JP7164457B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine in which a fanfare period for executing a fanfare performance of a big win is set longer for a big win that is advantageous to a player than for a big win that is disadvantageous (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Thus, if the fanfare period is lengthened, the interval between the big wins and the next big wins becomes longer, the number of prize balls given to the player per unit period can be reduced, and the gambling nature becomes too high. can be suppressed.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-148

However, if the fanfare period for an advantageous big win is simply set to be long, the player will see a long fanfare effect every time an advantageous big win is won. For this reason, although it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming too high, there is a possibility that the amusement of the game may decrease.

The present invention has been devised in view of such circumstances, and its object is to reduce the game value given to the player per unit period and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game. It is to provide a game machine that is

(A) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Controllable to one of a plurality of types of advantageous states including a first type of advantageous state and a second type of advantageous state in which the expected value of the game value to be obtained is lower than that of the first type of advantageous state. favorable state control means;
variable means capable of changing to a state in which game media can be entered in an advantageous state;
a notification effect means capable of executing a notification effect, which notifies that the control is performed to an advantageous state;
after the end of the notification effect, a specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect in a specific period until the variable means changes to a state in which the game medium can enter,
The specific period is longer when controlled to the first type of advantageous state than when controlled to the second type of advantageous state,
The notification effect means is
a first notification effect for informing that the player will be controlled to the first type of advantageous state after suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the first type of advantageous state in a manner that can specify that the player will be controlled to the first type of advantageous state;
a second notification effect for notifying that the second type of advantageous state will be controlled after suggesting the possibility of the advantageous state being achieved in a manner that can specify that the second type of advantageous state will be controlled; is executable and
The specific production means is
a first specific effect that congratulates the player, which is an effect that is executed after the end of the first notification effect and is not executed after the end of the second notification effect;
A second specific effect that is executed after the end of the second notification effect and notifies that the control to the first type of advantageous state is promoted as if promoted;
A third specific effect that is executed after the end of the second notification effect and notifies that the second type of advantageous state is controlled ,
The execution period of the first specific effect is longer than that of the second specific effect,
The execution period of the second specific effect is longer than that of the third specific effect.
It is characterized by
(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
Compared to the first type of advantageous state (for example, 16R big win) and the first type of advantageous state, the expected value of the game value (for example, prize balls) to be obtained is low (for example, the number of rounds is small, the big win Advantageous state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling any of a plurality of types of advantageous states including a second type of advantageous state (for example, 4R jackpot) (low probability of winning a big hit later); ,
Variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7) that can be changed to a state (for example, open state) in which game media can be won in an advantageous state;
A notification effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, effect from reach period to undetermined symbol display) to notify that it is controlled to an advantageous state;
After the end of the notification effect, a specific effect ( For example, a specific effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect of the pattern undetermined period, the effect of the pattern fixed period, the effect of the fanfare period),
The specific period is longer when controlled to the first type of advantageous state than when controlled to the second type of advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-3 to 9-5, FIG. 9 As indicated by -7, in the case of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the pattern undetermined period is longer than in the case of other jackpots.The reach period, the pattern fixed period, and the fanfare period may be lengthened.),
The notification effect means is
After suggesting the possibility of being in an advantageous state (for example, 7-pattern reach) in a manner that can specify that it is controlled to the first type of advantageous state, it is notified that it is controlled to the first type of advantageous state. (For example, undetermined display of 7 patterns) 1st notification effect (for example, effect from the reach period of FIG. 9-7 (B) to undetermined pattern display, see FIGS. 9-9 (B) and (C) )When,
After suggesting the possibility of being in an advantageous state (for example, even number symbol reach) in a manner that can specify that it is controlled to the second type of advantageous state, it is notified that it is controlled to the second type of advantageous state. (For example, undetermined display of even-numbered patterns) Second notification effect (for example, production from reach period to undetermined pattern display in FIGS. 9-7 (A) and 9-7 (C), FIG. 9-8 (B), (C), see FIGS. 9-10 (B), (C)),
The specific production means is
A first specific effect that is executed after the end of the first notification effect and is not executed after the end of the second notification effect (for example, a pre-fanfare effect similar to the fanfare effect during the symbol undetermined period in FIG. 9-7 (B) )When,
It is possible to execute a second specific effect (for example, the promotion success effect of FIG. 9-7 (A)) that is executed after the end of the second notification effect and notifies that the first type of advantageous state is controlled. can be,
The execution period of the first specific effect is longer than that of the second specific effect (see, for example, FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C)),
moreover,
Any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player can be set,
Predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display setting suggestion based on, or a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 can be executed),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, as a second embodiment, As shown, during variable display of normal reach or super reach, the predetermined effect is executed at the second number of times after the first number of times among the plurality of times than when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of times among the plurality of times. When executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a higher rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 Based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period after the first period is based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 which is a special pattern. The part that executes reach notice at a high rate)
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, the state in which the variable winning means can win game media when controlled to the first type of advantageous state, compared to when controlled to the second type of advantageous state. By lengthening the period until the control is completed, the game value given to the player per unit period can be reduced. Further, even if the period until the variable winning means is controlled to the state in which the game medium can win a prize is lengthened, the first notification effect, the second notification effect, the first specific effect, or the second specific effect can be obtained. Since the effect can be executed, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered. In addition, when the first kind of advantageous state is controlled, the first specific effect having a long execution period is executed, so that the player can be given a sense of superiority. In addition, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be heightened at a timing close to one game result.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The specific effect means is executed after the end of the second notification effect, and a third specific effect (for example, the promotion failure effect in FIG. ) can also be performed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first type of advantageous state or the second type of advantageous state will be reached after the end of the second notification performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can be done.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The specific effect means does not execute the third specific effect after the end of the second notification effect, and a fourth specific effect (for example, FIG. 9- 4, an effect for informing that the second kind of advantageous state has been established without executing the promotion failure effect, shown by the variation patterns PB5-8 and PB5-10 in FIG. 9-5, can be further executed.

According to such a configuration, when the expected value of the game value to be obtained is the second type advantageous state, which is lower than the first type advantageous state, the advantageous state is controlled by executing the third specific effect. Since it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of expectation that the type of the game may actually be the first type of game state, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
Further comprising a special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state) different from the advantageous state,
The advantageous state control means, when being controlled to the special state, controls to the first type of advantageous state at a rate higher than that of the second type (see, for example, FIG. 9-1).

According to such a configuration, in the special state, since the rate of being controlled to the first type of advantageous state increases and the rate of execution of the second specific effect also increases, the second specific effect is executed. Players' expectations can be heightened.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
When the notification effect means suggests the possibility of becoming an advantageous state in a manner that can be specified to be controlled to the first type of advantageous state (for example, "7" symbol reach), the second type of Compared to the case of suggesting the possibility of being in an advantageous state (for example, "6" symbol reach) in a manner in which control to be in an advantageous state can be specified, the degree of expectation of being advantageous to the player is increased. Execute the notification effect (for example, as shown by the variation pattern PB5-5 in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, in the case of 7 symbol reach, the big hit is confirmed, but in the case of other symbol reach, It is not a big hit confirmation.In the case of "7" pattern reach, it is a probability variation confirmation, but in the case of other pattern reach, it may not be a probability variation confirmation.If it is not a probability variation confirmation, you can promote it to a probability variation. You may make it report|report after that whether it is not.).

According to such a configuration, when the possibility of the first type advantageous state in which the expected value of the game value to be obtained is high is suggested, it is often advantageous for the player. By suggesting the possibility of a state, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
further comprising a movable member (eg, movable body 32),
The specific effect means makes it easier to operate the movable member when executing the first specific effect than when executing the second specific effect (for example, in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5). In the variation patterns PB5-4 and PB5-14, the movable body 32 is operated once, and in the variation patterns PB5-5 of FIGS.9-4 and 9-5, the movable body 32 is operated twice. In addition, only the first movable member may be operated when executing the second specific effect, and the first movable member and the second movable member may be operated when executing the first specific effect.).

According to such a configuration, the action of the movable member can enhance the amusement of the game.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
Action detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, operation detection unit 31) for detecting actions by the player is further provided,
When the specific effect means executes the first specific effect, the number of times of executing the effect that prompts the player to act is smaller than when the second specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 9- 4, the variation patterns PB5-4 and PB5-14 in FIGS. 9-5 prompt repeated hits, and the variation patterns PB5-5 in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5 prompt one operation).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by the effect of prompting the action of the player.

(8) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
The first specific effect in the first game state (for example, high-probability-high base state) is a second game state (for example, low-probability-high base state, The execution period is longer than the first specific effect in the low probability low base state) (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4, 9-5, and 9-13, the 16R probability variable jackpot in the low probability high base state If the 16R probability variable big hit is achieved in the high probability high base state, the execution period of the promotion effect is lengthened).

According to such a configuration, the first specific effect whose execution time is longer than that of the first specific effect in the second game state is executed in the first game state which is more advantageous for the player than in the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
After suggesting the type of advantageous state, during the period until the variable prize winning means changes to a state in which the game medium can be won, a special suggestive effect that suggests a game state after the advantageous state can be executed. Further equipped with suggestive production means,
The special suggestion directing means includes:
A first special suggestion effect that suggests a transition to a first game state (for example, high probability and high base state);
and a second special suggestion performance suggesting a transition to a second game state (for example, a low-probability-high base state, a low-probability-low base state) that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the first game state. ,
The first special suggestion effect has a longer execution period than the second special suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4, 9-5, and 9-7, the transition to the low probability high base state The execution period of the promotion success effect suggesting a transition to the high-probability-high base state is longer than the execution period of the promotion failure effect suggesting .

According to such a configuration, the transition to the first game state, which is more advantageous for the player than the second game state, takes longer to execute than the second special suggestion performance suggesting the transition to the second game state. Since the first special suggestion effect suggesting is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions relating to gaming machines of the following (10) to (15). Conventionally, in game machines, it is possible to change the probability that the variable display result will be a big hit (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) by changing the set value, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There was a setting suggesting production that suggested a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. In the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the setting suggesting effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times, no consideration is given to how the setting suggesting effect is executed in the first and second out of the plurality of times. In view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably performing a setting suggesting effect.

(10) One of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player and that has different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to a value,
Predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display setting suggestion based on, or a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 can be executed),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, as a second embodiment, As shown, during variable display of normal reach or super reach, the predetermined effect is executed at the second number of times after the first number of times among the plurality of times than when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of times among the plurality of times. When executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a higher rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 Based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period after the first period is based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 which is a special pattern. The part that executes reach notice at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special mode is more likely to be executed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be heightened at a timing close to one game result.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above,
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing the predetermined effect in the specific mode at a rate lower than the rate of executing the predetermined effect in the specific mode in the first number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period in the second period after the first period part that executes the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns, at a lower rate when executing the effect during variable display)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the sense of expectation for an advantageous state by making it easier to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at a timing close to one game result.

(12) In the gaming machine of either (10) or (11) above,
The predetermined effect execution means is
When executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22 as the second embodiment Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, the setting suggestion based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is changed to the special pattern PT- 8 or the part that runs at a higher rate than the reach notice based on pattern PT-9),
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22 as the second embodiment 2, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period, the reach notice based on the special pattern pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is changed to the specific pattern pattern PT-1 to The part that runs at a higher rate than suggested by any of the PT-7)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special mode is more likely to be executed, while the predetermined effect of the specific mode is less likely to be executed. It is possible to suitably increase the sense of expectation.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (12) above,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7 The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the variable display effect process),
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a special aspect or a specific aspect of the predetermined effect in one variable display, thereby improving interest.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (13) above,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7 The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern by executing the effect processing during variable display),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is Part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a pre-reading notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until start)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the set mode can be executed before the variable display as one game result is started, the interest is improved.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (14) above,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode, which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are executable, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, when displaying the image Z1 of the paraglider, the paraglider in which the character appears moves image, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a figure which shows the example of determination, such as a special figure display result. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a fanfare time table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening post-processing. It is a figure which shows an ending time table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of waiting processing per special figure. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot start processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of fanfare effect execution processing; FIG. It is a timing chart which shows an example of fanfare production. It is a screen transition diagram showing the flow of fanfare effect. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during a round. It is a flow chart which shows ending production selection 1st processing and 2nd processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of post-round processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big-hit after-end process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ending production execution processing. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the flow of selection of the kind of ending production. It is a timing chart which shows an example of ending production. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the flow of ending production. It is a timing chart which shows an example of ending production in a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of determination, such as a special figure display result. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure which illustrates the variation pattern at the time of a low-probability-low base. It is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern at the time of high probability height base. It is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern at the time of low probability height base. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of a variable display start setting process and an example of an effect process during variable display. FIG. 11 is a first timing chart showing an example of an effect from the variable display to the start of the first round of big wins; FIG. FIG. 10 is a first screen transition diagram showing the flow of effects from during variable display to the start of the first round of big wins. FIG. 10 is a second screen transition diagram showing the flow of effects from the time of variable display to the start of the first round of big wins. FIG. 11 is a third screen transition diagram showing the flow of effects from the time of variable display to the start of the first round of big wins. FIG. 11 is a second timing chart showing an example of an effect from the variable display to the start of the first round of big wins; FIG. FIG. 14 is a fourth screen transition diagram showing the flow of effects from the time of variable display to the start of the first round of big wins. FIG. 11 is a third timing chart showing an example of the effects from the variable display to the start of the first round of big wins; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of processing for determining effects during variable display; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect type during variable display; (A) is a diagram showing an effect (prediction of reach) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. FIG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of effects during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (low) presentation mode based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (high) presentation mode based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect determination processing as Modified Example 1, and (B) is a diagram showing determination ratios of reach notice and setting suggestion when using effect type determination table C. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as a second embodiment, and (B) is a view showing an effect execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period at set values 1 and 6 with the fluctuation pattern normal reach, (B) is set with the fluctuation pattern super reach It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the value 1 and the setting value 6. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach and the setting value is 1 and setting value 6 in Example 3, and (B) is a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the setting value 1 and the setting value 6 in super reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as Example 4; FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect determination processing as a fourth embodiment; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period at set value 1 and set value 6 with the fluctuation pattern common to normal reach and super reach in Example 4, (B) shows the fluctuation pattern A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 with normal reach, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 with super reach It is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of variable display effect type determination in the first period; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as Modified Example 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period at set value 1 and set value 6 common to all variation patterns in modification 2, (B) is a variation pattern normal reach / super reach A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 in common, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern common to normal reach and super reach, setting values 1 and 6 at setting values 1 and 6 It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in 3 periods.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, "variable display (also referred to as variable display)" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. (Also referred to as production pattern) variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of characteristic portion 069F of the present embodiment)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, problems may arise from the following viewpoints. Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine with a long jackpot and a short jackpot in which the ending effect of the jackpot is executed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-7165). In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-7165, a short ending time is selected when the probability variable jackpot is won. However, when advantageous big wins occur in succession, the ending period is shortened, the interval between the next big wins is shortened, and the speed at which prize balls can be won becomes faster, which reduces gambling properties. There was a risk that the height would be too high. Gaming machines according to inventions 069F to 071F for solving such problems are proposed below.

Further, conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which the fanfare period at the start of the big win is set longer for the advantageous big win than for the disadvantageous big win (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-148). However, simply setting a longer fanfare period for an advantageous big win may lead to a decrease in interest. Gaming machines according to inventions 073F and 074F for solving such problems are proposed below. In addition, hereinafter, the features of the game machines according to inventions 069F to 071F, invention 073F, and invention 074F are expressed as a feature part 069F. Characteristic portion 069F is applicable to pachinko game machine 1 described above.

FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. Hereinafter, the description of the configuration common to that of FIG. 1 will not be repeated.

The game area 2 formed on the board surface of the game board includes a left game area 2A on the left side of the top of the image display device 5 and a right game area 2B on the right side. If the left game area 2A, which is the first game area, and the right game area 2B, which is the second game area, are separated by, for example, the end surface of the image display device 5 inside the game area 2, the arrangement PL of the nails, etc. good. The game ball fired from the ball shooting device and hit into the game area 2 is guided to the left game area 2A, which is the first game area, for example, by being guided along the nail arrangement PL. , it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area 2B, which is the second game area.

A normal winning ball device 6A is provided in the left game area 2A. For example, the normal winning ball device 6A is provided in the lower center of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. The normal winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this way, the left game area 2A is provided with the normal winning ball device 6A that forms the first starting winning hole into which game balls can enter at all times.

A normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the right game area 2B. The normal variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that change between a closed state that is a vertical position and an open state that is a tilted position by means of a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 8-2. A tulip-shaped accessory is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, the movable wing is in a vertical position, thereby closing the second starting winning hole so that the game ball does not pass. state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the movable wing is in the tilted position, so that the game ball can pass through the second starting winning hole. leave it open. In addition, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in a normal open state when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, and while the game ball can enter the second start winning hole, it is in the expanded open state when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state. It may be configured so that it is difficult for game balls to enter. In this way, in the right game area 2B, there is a normal variable state that can be changed between a first variable state in which the game ball can pass through the second start winning hole and a second variable state in which the game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass. A winning ball device 6B is provided.

The game ball guided to the left game area 2A, which is the first game area, by the arrangement of the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, etc. in the left game area 2A and the right game area 2B is the second game area. It is impossible or difficult to pass through the second starting winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B provided in the right game area 2B. In addition, the game ball guided to the right game area 2B, which is the second game area, passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A provided in the left game area 2A, which is the first game area. Impossible or difficult to pass.

A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 8-2. A game ball that has entered the second starting winning hole formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected, for example, by the second starting hole switch 22B shown in FIG. 8-2. Based on the detection of game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and when the first reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, the first start Condition is met. Based on the detection of game balls by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and when the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, the second start Condition is met. The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of game balls by the first starting port switch 22A and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of game balls by the second starting port switch 22B may be the same number as each other, or may be different numbers.

Two special variable winning ball devices are provided below the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The upper special variable prize winning ball device 7A includes an upper special winning prize opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82A for the upper special winning prize opening door shown in FIG. 8-2. Forms a large winning opening that changes to . As an example, in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A, the upper special winning opening door closes the upper special winning opening when the solenoid 82A for the upper special winning opening door is in the OFF state. On the other hand, in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A, the upper special winning opening door opens the upper special winning opening when the solenoid 82A for the upper special winning opening door is on. A game ball entering the upper special winning opening formed in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is detected by, for example, an upper special winning opening switch 23A shown in FIG. 8-2. In this embodiment, the upper and lower special prize openings have the same door-shaped shape, but the two special prize openings may have different shapes. For example, one of them may be an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that change between a closed state and an open state like the variable winning ball device 6B, or it may be stored in the game area 2. It is good also as a prize-winning mouth which changes into the state projected from.

The lower special variable prize winning ball device 7B has a lower special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82B for the lower special winning prize opening door shown in FIG. Forms a lower prize-winning opening that changes to As an example, in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, the lower special winning opening door closes the lower special winning opening when the solenoid 82B for the lower special winning opening door is in the OFF state. On the other hand, in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, the lower special winning opening door opens the lower special winning opening when the solenoid 82B for the lower special winning opening door is on. A game ball entering the lower special winning ball device 7B formed in the lower special winning ball device 7B, for example, is detected by the lower large winning opening switch 23B shown in FIG. 8-2.

A large number of game balls are paid out as prize balls by passing the game balls through the upper big prize opening formed by the upper special variable prize ball device 7A and the lower big prize prize opening formed by the lower special variable prize ball device 7B. That is, the upper special variable winning ball device 7A becomes the first state advantageous to the player by opening the upper special winning opening by the upper special winning opening door. The lower special variable winning ball device 7B is in a first state advantageous to the player by opening the lower special winning opening by the lower special winning opening door. On the other hand, the upper special variable winning ball device 7A enters a second state disadvantageous to the player by closing the upper special winning opening with the upper special winning opening door. The lower special variable prize winning ball device 7B enters a second state disadvantageous to the player by closing the lower special prize winning opening with the lower special winning prize opening door. Instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through the upper and lower special prize openings, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state in which the game balls are difficult to pass through the upper and lower special prize openings is provided. You can set the state.

Inside the upper special variable winning ball device 7A, there is provided a discharge path through which game balls that have entered the upper special winning port opened by the upper special winning ball device 7A are discharged from the upper special winning ball device 7A. there is Game balls discharged from the upper special variable winning ball device 7A are detected by the first discharge switch 24C installed in the discharge path.

Inside the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, the game ball that has entered the lower large winning opening opened by the lower large winning opening door passes through or does not pass through a predetermined probability variable area. A guide route is provided for guiding to a discharge route discharged from the special variable winning ball device 7B. The game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B first passes through a route provided with a lower large winning opening switch 23B for detecting the winning game ball, It is guided to a branch point to a taxiway that guides to the discharge route without passing through the area. When the game ball guided to the branch point flows down the guide path to the variable probability area, the variable probability control condition for entering the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state is established by detecting the game ball by the variable probability area switch 24A. To establish. That is, the location of the variable probability region switch 24A is set as a variable probability region, and a predetermined variable probability control condition can be established based on the game ball passing through this variable probability region. Since the probability variable region is inside the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, only game balls that have won the lower special variable winning ball device 7B can pass through.

The variable probability area changes to an open state through which the game ball can pass and a closed state through which the game ball cannot pass, by the variable probability area lid driven by the solenoid 82C for the variable probability area lid. As an example, when the solenoid 82C for the probability variable region lid is in the OFF state, the probability variable region lid moves to a position to close the probability variable region, and the probability variable region is closed. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82C for the probability variable region lid is in the ON state, the probability variable region lid moves to a position where the probability variable region is not blocked, and the probability variable region is opened. A game ball reaching a branch point when the variable probability area is in a closed state is discharged as it is from the lower special variable winning ball device 7B without passing through the variable probability area. In this case, the game ball is detected by the second discharge switch 24B installed in the common discharge path. On the other hand, the game ball that reaches the branch point when the probability variable region is in the open state passes through the probability variable region and is detected by the probability variable region switch 24A installed in the probability variable region. Then, the game ball that has passed through the variable probability area is discharged from the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. When the game ball that has won the lower special variable winning ball device 7B passes through the variable probability area, the variable probability area switch 24A is controlled to the variable probability state based on the detection of the game ball that has passed through the variable probability area. Therefore, by adjusting the rate at which the game ball wins the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, and the length and timing of the time the variable probability area lid is in the allowable position, the rate of controlling to the variable probability state is preferably set. be able to.

In the present embodiment, at least the vicinity of the variable probability area is configured to be visible to the player in the interior of the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. Therefore, it is possible for the player to confirm whether or not the game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B has passed through the variable probability area.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball passes through the first start winning hole formed by the normal winning ball device 6A in the left gaming area 2A, the game ball is detected by the first starting hole switch 22A shown in FIG. 8-2. The first start condition is satisfied by the fact that the After that, for example, based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit game state, etc., the special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball passes through the second starting winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in the right game area 2B, the game ball is detected by the second starting hole switch 22B shown in FIG. 8-2. Thus, the second starting condition is satisfied. After that, for example, based on the establishment of the second start condition due to the end of the previous special game or the jackpot game state, etc., the special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. However, when the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the normal open state or closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning hole.

In the present embodiment, since the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the second variable state in the normal game state different from the variable probability state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning hole. . Therefore, the special figure game using the second special figure is not started. Therefore, in the normal game state which is not yet controlled to the probability variable state, the player guides the game ball to the left game area 2A, and the special figure game using the first special figure based on the winning to the first start winning opening. and aim for the "jackpot" of the special game. In the jackpot game state based on the result of the special game using the first special prize, the variable display result of "jackpot" is derived, and the game ball enters the lower special variable winning ball device 7B in a specific round. , Furthermore, it becomes possible to pass through the probability variable area. When the game ball passes through the variable probability region, the variable probability confirmation flag is set, and the transition to the special game state controlled to the variable probability state is confirmed. After that, when the jackpot game state ends, it is controlled to the probability variable state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B changes to the first variable state, and the game ball can pass through the second starting winning hole. In this embodiment, the second special game is more advantageous than the first special game. Therefore, the player guides the game ball to the right game area 2A, starts the special symbol game using the second special symbol based on the winning in the second start winning port, and the "big hit" of the special symbol game. ” will be aimed at. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of game experiences that change according to the game state.

In the jackpot game state, the upper big winning hole or the lower big winning hole is opened, and the upper special variable winning ball device 7A or the lower special variable winning ball device 7B becomes the first state advantageous to the player. Then, during the predetermined period or the period until the predetermined number of game balls enter the upper big winning opening or the lower big winning opening and the winning balls are generated, the upper big winning opening or the lower big winning opening is continued. A round game in an open state is executed. During a period other than the execution period of such a round game, the upper and lower special prize openings are closed, making it difficult or impossible to produce winning balls. When a game ball enters the upper special winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the upper special winning opening switch 23A, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls for each detection. When a game ball enters the lower special winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the lower special winning opening switch 23B, and a predetermined number of game balls are similarly paid out. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times is reached. Therefore, in the jackpot game state, the player can very easily obtain a large number of prize balls, which is advantageous for the player. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give a score corresponding to the number of game balls to be prize balls.

After the big winning game state is finished, based on the establishment of a predetermined variable probability control condition, the variable display result may be controlled to a variable probability state in which the probability of becoming a "big win" is higher than that in the normal state. In the present embodiment, the probability variable control condition is that the probability variable region switch 24A detects the passage of the game ball entering the lower special variable winning ball device 7B from the lower big winning hole to the variable probability region. This variable probability state is controlled to continue until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times. That is, the end of the variable display for a predetermined number of times is the probability variable end condition.

In the probability variable state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, which is in the second variable state in the normal state, is changed to the first variable state in which the game ball can pass through the second start winning hole and the second variable state in which the game ball cannot pass. change. Thus, the control for changing the normal variable winning ball device 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state is referred to as electric chew opening control. In the present embodiment, the second special game, which is started based on the game ball passing through the second start winning opening, is started based on passing through the first starting winning opening that can be passed even in the normal state. It is more advantageous for the player than the first special game that is used. Therefore, the variable probability state in which the electric chew opening control is executed becomes a special game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In addition, when the variable probability control is performed in the variable probability state, the electric chew opening control may not be performed. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the upper limit time for which the upper and lower big prize openings are open in the jackpot game state is short, and the game ball is difficult or impossible to pass through. After the game is executed and the jackpot game state ends, there is a case where the probability variable state is controlled. In such a case, the jackpot type is also called "probable". Then, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability" when the electric chew opening control is not performed, the probability change state is performed after the big hit game state is finished, and the probability change control is performed. The electric chew opening control may not be performed.

The game balls used as game media in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recorded information of the points given corresponding to the number thereof have a value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. I wish I had. Alternatively, these game balls and recorded score information may have a valuable value that can be used for another game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, although they cannot be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes.

In addition, the game value that can be imparted in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the payout of game balls serving as prize balls or the awarding of points. the ratio of selecting a more advantageous jackpot game state when a jackpot is achieved is a first ratio higher than the second ratio; the upper limit number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the second ratio; It may include a game situation that is advantageous to the player, such as the number of first rounds being larger than the number of rounds, and the probability of a big win in the variable probability state becoming the first probability higher than the second probability. .

In this embodiment, a round game of the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is executed. Of these, when the number of executions of the round game reaches "3" as a specific number of times, a round game is executed in which the lower special prize winning opening is opened, and the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is advantageous to the player. It becomes the first state. On the other hand, when the number of executions of the round game is other than "3" as the specific number of times, a round game is executed in which the upper special winning opening is opened, and the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is the first advantageous to the player. state. In the round game executed for the third time, the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is in the first state, and the game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B can pass through the variable probability area. It is also called a variable open round game. In contrast, the round game in which the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is in the first state other than the third time is also called a normal open round game. In addition, the period during which one round game is executed is defined as one round, and the jackpot game state executed based on one "jackpot" includes a plurality of rounds. Among these, the round in which the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is opened for the third time is expressed as the lower open round. Other rounds in which the upper special variable prize winning device 7A is in an open state are referred to as upper open rounds. That is, when the variable display result is "big win", in the big win game state controlled based on the "big win", the round game in which the operation time of the lower big prize door is provided and the upper big prize A plurality of round games including a round game in which the operation time of the entrance door is provided are executed.

In the present embodiment, as a jackpot type when the variable display result is a "jackpot", in a jackpot game state controlled based on the "jackpot", the number of executions of the round game is "3" as a specific number of times. When , there are a plurality of types of jackpots with different upper limit times for opening the lower big winning opening. As an example, when the jackpot type is the "first jackpot", the game is controlled to the "first jackpot game state" in which the upper limit time for opening the lower jackpot is set to 52 milliseconds. When the big win type is 'second big win' or 'third big win', the game is controlled to a big win game state in which the upper limit time for opening the lower big win port is set longer than that of the first big win. In the first jackpot game state, since the control time for the open state is as short as 52 milliseconds, the rate at which game balls can actually enter the lower special prize winning opening and enter the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is low. Therefore, when the jackpot type is the ``first jackpot'', the probability of the game ball passing through the lower jackpot is low, and the variable probability control condition for entering the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state is difficult to establish. On the other hand, in the second jackpot or third jackpot game state, it is opened for about 29 seconds. can enter the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the variable probability control condition for entering the variable probability state is likely to be established.

Which one of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be is determined at a predetermined ratio, for example, in response to the decision to set the variable display result to "jackpot" at the start of the special game. When the game balls enter the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, not only are the predetermined number of game balls put out, but also the game balls pass through the probability variable area depending on the position of the probability variable area lid, and the variable display result becomes "big hit". The probability is controlled to a higher probability variable state than the non-probability variable state. Therefore, the second and third jackpot gaming states are more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot gaming state. In addition, the third jackpot game state is more advantageous to the player than the second jackpot game state in terms of the payout of prize balls in the upper open round. The second big win is more advantageous to the player than the first big win in terms of payout of prize balls and satisfaction of variable probability control conditions.

In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are displayed. Various processes are selected in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and to set the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A and the lower special variable winning ball device 7B according to a predetermined procedure. executed.

Following the special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes probability variable area solenoid control processing for controlling the position of the probability variable area lid and the validity and invalidity of the probability variable area. In the probability variable area solenoid control process, the CPU 103 controls the opening and closing of the probability variable area lid based on the fact that the value of the probability variable area solenoid control code set in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the jackpot game state is set to "1". Then, the valid/invalid switching control of the probability variable area is executed. For example, the opening and closing of the variable probability area lid, and the switching of valid/invalid of the variable probability area is performed based on the variable probability solenoid pattern table. The variable probability solenoid pattern table may be a table in which the timing of switching the open/closed state of the variable probability region lid and the timing of switching the validity/invalidity of the variable probability region are stored in association with the elapsed time from the start of the round in the round game. Alternatively, in conjunction with the opening and closing of the lower special winning opening, when the lower special winning opening is in an open state, the probability variable area is also in an open state, and the probability variable area may be made effective. On the other hand, when the lower special winning opening is in a closed state, the variable probability area may also be in a closed state, and the variable probability area may be invalidated. In the variable probability area solenoid control process, a use pattern is selected from a plurality of variable probability solenoid pattern tables stored in the ROM 101 according to the jackpot type and the number of rounds of the round game to be executed. Then, based on the selected usage pattern, the probability variable area detection enable flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is updated. Further, according to the value of the read solenoid output designation data, by updating the probability variable region solenoid buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, the solenoid 82C for the probability variable region lid is turned on and off according to the solenoid output designation data. to control. That is, the position of the probability variable region lid is controlled. It should be noted that the probability variable area solenoid buffer is an output buffer for outputting a control signal specifying ON and OFF to the solenoid 82C for the probability variable area lid, and according to the value stored in this buffer, the probability variable in the command control process A control signal is output to the solenoid 82C for the area cover.

FIG. 8-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 of FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. Select and execute. Among the descriptions of these processes, descriptions similar to those described with reference to FIG. 7 will not be repeated.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this jackpot opening preprocessing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "jackpot", execution of a round game corresponding to the type of jackpot is started in the jackpot game state, and an upper jackpot or a lower jackpot is opened. It includes a process for setting the open state. In the present embodiment, in this big hit opening pre-processing, it is determined whether or not the round game to be started is a variable probability open round in which the lower big winning opening is opened, and if it is a variable probability open round , The processing of setting the probability variable area solenoid control code to 1 as common control data supporting the start of the position control of the probability variable area lid and the start of the effective and invalid probability variable area control is further included. Further, processing for updating the solenoid output data table is also included according to the big winning opening to be opened. When the jackpot opening pretreatment is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". This process during the opening of the big win includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the upper big winning opening or the lower big winning opening is opened, and the measured elapsed time and the upper big winning opening switch 23A or the lower big winning opening switch 23B. Based on the number of game balls detected by, the process of determining whether or not it is time to return the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening from the open state to the closed state. In this jackpot open process, a lower big winning opening detection process is further executed in the probability variable open round. In addition, the lower special winning hole detection process is performed based on the number of game balls that have won the lower special variable winning ball device 7B and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. Processing for counting game balls in the device 7B, processing for determining whether or not passage of the game ball into the probability variable region is detected, probability variable determination flag when detecting passage of the probability variable region when the probability variable region is valid Includes processing to set. Then, when the upper big winning opening or the lower big winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". In this embodiment, when the round game is finished, the process of closing the upper big winning opening and the lower big winning opening are executed even if either the upper big winning opening or the lower big winning opening is closed. A process for closing the winning opening is also executed. Therefore, the process of determining which of the upper special winning opening and the lower special winning opening is to be closed is not required. In addition, whether the number of big winning holes to be used is reduced or increased, it is only necessary to delete or add the closed state process, so design change is easy.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game with the upper big winning opening or the lower big winning opening in the open state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times, and In this case, it includes a process of waiting until the next round game is started. In the present embodiment, in this jackpot opening post-processing, the above-described lower big winning opening detection processing is further executed in the variable probability opening round. In addition, the jackpot opening post-processing further includes processing for permitting execution of control after the round being executed based on the number of game balls in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B counted by the jackpot opening detection processing. included. Then, when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the number of execution times of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7".

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this jackpot end processing, a waiting period corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as a effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is performed. It includes processing to wait until time elapses, and processing to perform various settings for controlling the variable probability state and time saving state corresponding to the success or failure of the variable probability control condition. And, when the setting for controlling the variable probability state and the time saving state is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 8-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 8-3 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step S231). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S231, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting section 154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure suspension storage number is other than "0" in step S231 (step S231; NO), the suspension stored corresponding to the suspension number "1" in the second special figure suspension storage unit 151B As data, the numerical data representing the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the process of step S232, for example, by updating the second reservation storage number count value by subtracting 1, etc., the second special figure reservation storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure The pending data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries below the pending number "1" in the pending storage unit 151B are shifted upward by one entry (step S233). Further, in the processing of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total reserved memory number count value stored in the total reserved memory number counter so as to subtract one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure specification buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure specification buffer is updated to "2" (step S234).

When the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step S235). The number of first special figure reserved storage is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads out the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". do it. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" in step S231, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" in step S235 (step S235; NO), the suspension stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit 151A As data, the numerical data representing the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the process of step S236, for example, by subtracting 1 and updating the first reservation storage number count value, etc., the first special figure reservation storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure The pending data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries below the pending number "1" in the pending storage unit are shifted upward one entry at a time (step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total reserved memory number count value stored in the total reserved memory number counter so as to subtract 1. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

After executing either of the processes of steps S234 and S238, it is determined whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "big win" or a "loss" (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing it in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, depending on whether it is a probability variation state in which probability variation control is performed, etc., the numerical value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the special figure display result "jackpot ” or “losing”. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read from the variable random number buffer.

FIG. 8-5(A) shows an example of determination in the process of step S239. In this determination example, depending on the presence or absence of probability variation control in the probability variation state, the determination ratio of whether or not the special figure display result is a "jackpot" is varied. More specifically, when the variable probability control is performed in the variable probability state, the special figure display result is determined as ``big hit'' at a higher rate than when the variable probability control is not performed in the normal state. Therefore, in the variable probability state where the variable probability control is performed, the special figure display result is more likely to become a ``big hit'' than in the normal state where the variable probability control is not performed, and the big win game state is likely to occur. That is, the variable probability state in which the variable probability control is performed is more advantageous to the player than the normal state in which the variable probability control is not performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S239 is a "jackpot" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be a "big hit" (step S240; YES), for example, the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the ON state (step S241), the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, the numerical value to be compared with the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type is assigned to the determination result of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is determined according to the variable special figure designation buffer value, etc. All you have to do is The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 read from the variable random number buffer.

FIG. 8-5(B) shows an example of determination in the process of step S242. In this determination example, the ratio of determination of the jackpot type is varied depending on whether the special symbol variably displayed in the special symbol game in which the start condition is established is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. ing. Here, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the condition for starting the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is established, and the variable special figure becomes the first special figure. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the conditions for starting the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B are established, and the variable special figure becomes the second special figure. In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-5(B), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the jackpot type is decided to be either "first jackpot" or "second jackpot". On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, only the "third big win" is determined as the jackpot type. That is, it is only when the variable special figure is the first special figure that the jackpot types are determined to be the "first jackpot" and the "second jackpot". In this way, different jackpot types may be determined according to the special symbols variably displayed in the special symbol game. Also, the jackpot type is determined to be the "third jackpot" only when the variable special figure is the second special figure.

In this embodiment, a round game of the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is executed, and the lower big prize opening is opened in a predetermined probability variable open round in the jackpot game state. In the normal open round, the upper special prize opening is opened. Here, when the jackpot type is the "second jackpot" and the "third jackpot", in a predetermined probability variable open round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot type is the "first jackpot". The upper limit time for the open state is lengthened, and the variable probability control condition for entering the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state is likely to be satisfied. By determining the jackpot type by the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, at a higher rate than when it is the first special figure, the jackpot game A probability variable control condition for becoming a probability variable state after the end of the state is established. That is, when the special figure display result is "big win" in the second special game, the variable probability control condition is more likely to be established than when the special figure display result is "big hit" in the first special game.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is the "first jackpot", the upper limit time for opening the lower big winning hole is as short as 52 milliseconds, so the rate of game balls entering the lower big winning hole is very high. low. Therefore, the rate at which the variable probability control condition is satisfied is very low. On the other hand, in the case of the "second big win" and the "third big win", since the upper limit time is 29 seconds, the probability of the game ball entering the lower big winning hole is high. Therefore, the probability that the variable probability control condition is established is high. In the present embodiment, when the "jackpot" is determined in the variable probability state, the "second jackpot" or "third jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, so the special game controlled from the normal game state to the variable probability state It is possible to set the ratio of the state to be low, while once controlled to the variable probability state, the “jackpot” continues at a high rate. As for the "second jackpot", the probability that the variable probability control condition is established is higher than the "first jackpot" as in the "third jackpot", but since the number of rounds is smaller than that of the third jackpot, the "jackpot" , the number of balls paid out as prize balls is reduced.

To explain the mechanism in detail, in a special game using the first special figure, when the variable display result is a "big hit", the first big win is given at a predetermined rate, and based on the "big hit" After the variable probability control condition is not satisfied in the big winning game state controlled by the , and after the big winning game state is finished, the state is shifted to the normal game state which is not controlled to the variable probability state. On the other hand, when the special figure game using the first special figure results in a "second jackpot", the probability variable control condition is satisfied at a high rate in the jackpot game state controlled based on the "jackpot", and the jackpot game is played. After the state is finished, it is controlled to a special game state controlled to a variable probability state. In the special game state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state, and a special figure game using the second special figure can be started. In a special game using the second special figure, when the variable display result is a ``big win'', the result is always a ``third big win'', so that after the big win is finished with a high probability, the game is controlled to the definite variable state again. For this reason, the "big hit" and the probability change state continue continuously until the probability change end condition is satisfied when all the special games of a predetermined number of times are "losers" in the probability change state. According to such a configuration, in the first special game performed in the normal game state, while reducing the ratio of the variable display result of the "second big win" as the big win type, once the variable display result of the "second big win" is displayed. After being derived, the probability that the variable probability state and the "jackpot" continue in succession increases, so that a sharp and stimulating gaming experience can be provided.

After executing the processing of step S242, the big hit type is stored (step S243). In the process of step S243, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as a jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type, if the jackpot type is stored. good.

When it is determined that it is not a "big hit" in step S240 (step S240; NO), after executing the process of step S243, the result of pre-determination as to whether or not to control to the big hit game state, furthermore, the big hit A fixed special symbol is set according to the determination result of the jackpot type in the gaming state (step S244). As an example, when it is determined that the special figure display result is not a "big hit" in step S240, the special figure display result corresponds to the pre-determined result of "losing", which becomes a losing pattern " A special design showing a symbol of "-" is set as a fixed special design. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is "big hit", any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is determined according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242. It is sufficient to set it as a fixed special symbol. In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is the "first jackpot", the symbol "5" or "9" is used, and when the jackpot type is the "second jackpot", the symbol "3" In the case of "three big hits", the symbol "7" is set as the fixed symbol for each special symbol.

After executing the process of step S244, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" (step S245), the special symbol normal process is terminated. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" in step S245, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 8-3 is executed.

If the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure in step S235 is "0" (step S235; YES), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S246), special symbols Terminate normal processing. In this demonstration display setting, for example, whether an effect control command designating a demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. determine whether or not At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is finished. On the other hand, if the command has not yet been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

FIG. 8-6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 8-3 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 8-6, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special symbol confirmation display flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. (Step S261). The special figure fixed display flag is set to the ON state in response to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game.

When the special figure confirmation display flag is off at step S261 (step S261; NO), the setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol is performed (step S262), and the command transmission setting at the time of design confirmation is set. is performed (step S263). For example, an effect control command prepared in advance as a pattern confirmation command is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 12 . Furthermore, a predetermined fixed time is set as special figure display time (step S264). And, after setting the special figure confirmation display flag to ON state (step S265), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. At this time, since the special figure process flag is not updated, the special symbol stop process is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs.

When the special figure confirmation display flag is ON in step S261 (step S261; YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S266). At this time, if the special figure confirmation display time has not elapsed (step S266; NO), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. Here, since the update of the special figure process flag is not performed, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol stop processing is executed again and waits until the special figure fixed display time elapses.

When the special figure confirmation display time has passed in step S266 (step S266; YES), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag and turning it off (step S267), whether the big hit flag is on is determined (step S268). Then, when the jackpot flag is ON (step S268; YES), the fanfare performance time corresponding to the jackpot type is set (step S269).

FIG. 8-7 is a diagram showing a fanfare time table. Referring to FIG. 8-7, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) and 8-7 (B) respectively, when the first hit occurs in the low base state, and in the high base state, the big win occurs. A fanfare performance time is set in advance according to the type of the big win for the time of consecutive chances.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the transmission setting of the jackpot start designation command capable of specifying the fanfare effect time corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (step S270), and the RAM 102 such as the game control flag setting unit 152, for example. A jackpot start flag provided in a predetermined area is set to ON state (step S271). Subsequently, the setting for ending the variable probability control is performed (step S272). For example, as the process of step S272, a process of clearing the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like to turn it off, or probability variation for counting the remaining number of times of the special figure game in which probability variation control is performed A process for clearing the number counter or the like may be executed.

The probability variable number counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the game control counter setting unit 154, for example, and corresponds to the upper limit number of times of the special game in which the probability variable control is performed when the probability variable state is entered after the end of the big hit game state. A count initial value may be set.

After executing the process of step S272, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "4" (step S273), the special symbol stop process is terminated. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "4", when the next timer interrupt occurs, the jackpot opening pre-processing of step S114 shown in FIG. 8-3 is executed.

When the jackpot flag is off in step S268 (step S268; NO), the value of the special figure process flag is initialized to "0" (step S274). After executing the process of step S274, it is determined whether or not to terminate the variable probability control (step S275). As an example, in the process of step S275, when the probability variation count value, which is the stored value of the probability variation count counter, is other than "0", the count value is updated by subtracting 1, etc., and the probability variation count after updating It is determined whether or not the count value matches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. At this time, if it matches the variable probability end determination value, the variable probability control may be ended by clearing a predetermined variable probability flag. On the other hand, if it does not match the variable probability end determination value, the state of the variable probability flag is maintained, and the process of step S275 may be terminated.

After executing the process of step S275, after setting for transmitting the game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S276), the special symbol stop process is terminated. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "0", when the next timer interrupt process occurs, the special symbol normal process of step S110 shown in FIG. 8-3 is executed.

FIG. 8-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S114 of FIG. 8-3 as the jackpot opening pre-processing. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 8-8, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (step S291). The jackpot flag is set to ON state by the process of step S271 shown in FIG. 8-6 corresponding to the start of the jackpot gaming state.

When the jackpot start flag is ON in step S291 (step S291; YES), it is determined whether or not the fanfare effect time has elapsed (step S292). At this time, if the fanfare effect time has not elapsed (step S292; NO), the big hit pre-opening process is terminated. Here, since the special figure process flag is not updated, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the jackpot opening pre-processing is executed again, and the fanfare performance time elapses.

When the fanfare production time has passed in step S292 (step S292; YES), as processing for starting the first round game in the big hit game state, after clearing the big hit start flag and turning it off (step S293), for example, a round counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the control counter setting unit 154, is set to "1" as an initial count value corresponding to the number of executions of the round game (step S294).

When the big hit start flag is off in step S291 (step S291; NO), after executing the process of step S294, for example, from the big hit type buffer provided in a predetermined area of RAM 102, Reads out the jackpot type buffer value indicating the jackpot type determined in step S245, for example, from the round counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the game control counter setting unit, a round indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started from now. A count value is read (step S295).

Then, based on the jackpot type buffer value and the round count value read out in step S295, the CPU 103 forms a big winning opening to be opened in the round game to be started in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A. Either the large winning opening or the lower large winning opening formed in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is determined (step S296). When the round count value is "3", it is determined to execute a round game in which the lower special prize opening is opened. On the other hand, when the round count value is other than "3", it is determined to execute a round game in which the upper big winning opening is opened. Therefore, when the number of executions of the round game reaches "3" as the specific number of times, a round game is executed in which the lower special prize winning opening is opened, and the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is the first game which is advantageous to the player. state.

The CPU 103 may set a detection effective switch for effectively detecting a game ball in conjunction with determining the large winning opening to be opened by the processing of step S296. For example, when the round count value is "3", detection of game balls by the lower special winning opening switch 23B is enabled in accordance with the opening of the lower special winning opening. On the other hand, when the round count value is other than "3", detection of game balls by the upper special winning opening switch 23A is enabled in accordance with the opening of the upper special winning opening.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the large winning opening to be opened determined in step S296 is the lower large winning opening (step S297). It is determined whether the value of the variable probability area solenoid control code set in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is "0" (step S298), and if the value of the variable probability area solenoid control code is "0" (step S298; YES), the value of the probability variable area solenoid control code is set to "1" which is a value corresponding to the probability variable area control pattern setting process (S299). The probability variable area solenoid control code is a control flag that specifies the position control of the probability variable area lid using the probability variable area solenoid in the probability variable area solenoid control area, and when the position control of the probability variable area lid is not performed, "0 ” and is set to “1” when starting the position control of the probability variable area lid. If it is determined in step S298 that the value of the variable probability area solenoid control code is not "0" (step S298: NO), the big hit opening pre-processing is terminated. Therefore, according to such a process, even if it is determined to open the lower large winning opening, if the value of the variable probability area solenoid control code is not "0", that is, to open the previous lower large winning opening When controlling the probability variable area lid corresponding to the round, it is possible to prevent the start of the round for opening the lower prize winning opening.

In step S297, it is determined that the determined big winning hole to be opened is not the lower big winning hole (step S297; NO), or when the process of step S299 is finished, the opening pattern of the big winning hole corresponding to the big win type. (step S300). According to such a process, if it is determined to open the upper big winning mouth, it does not refer to the value of the probability variable area solenoid control code, regardless of whether the probability variable area lid is controlled, It is possible to start a round to open the upper grand prize opening.

After executing the process of step S300, the solenoid control process for controlling each solenoid is executed (step S301).

After executing the process of step S301, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5" which is the value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (step S302).

After executing the process of step S302, the CPU 103 determines the interval time from closing the upper big winning opening to opening the lower big winning opening, and closing the lower big winning opening and then closing the upper big winning opening. Interval time setting processing for setting an interval time until the mouth is opened is executed (step S303). After executing the process of step S303, the CPU 103 ends the big hit opening pre-process.

FIG. 8-9 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 8-3 as the process during jackpot opening. 8-9, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the winning number count value has reached a predetermined maximum winning determination value (step S341). When the maximum winning determination value is not reached in step S341 (step S341; NO), it is determined whether or not an end code is set in the work table before opening the big winning opening (step S342). When it is determined that the end code is not set (step S342; NO), the electric accessary product release pattern process is executed (step S343). The electric accessary item opening pattern process is a process of controlling the opening and closing of the upper big winning opening or the lower big winning opening according to the opening/closing pattern indicated by the big winning opening opening pattern table determined in the process of step S300 in FIG. 8-8. .

After executing the processing of step S343 in FIG. 8-9, it is determined whether or not the count switch is on by checking the detection signal transmitted from the count switch (step S344). For example, in the processing of step S344, the detection signal transmitted from the count switch of the large winning opening whose opening/closing control is being performed, of the upper big winning opening and the lower big winning opening is checked. Then, when the count switch is off (step S344; NO), the process during big hit opening is terminated. On the other hand, when the count switch is on (step S344; YES), the winning prize number count value is updated by adding 1 (step S345), and then the process during the opening of the big win is finished.

When the count value of the number of winning prizes reaches the maximum winning determination value in step S341 (step S341; YES), for example, the drive of the solenoid corresponding to the large winning opening that is being controlled to open and close is stopped and the large winning prize is reached. A setting is made to close the mouth (step S346). For example, in the case where the opening/closing control is performed for the upper special winning opening, the driving of the upper special winning opening door solenoid 82A is stopped to set the upper special winning opening to the closed state.

After executing the process of step S346, or when it is determined that the end code is set in the process of step S342 (step S342; YES), to transmit the round end command to the effect control board 12 is set (step S347).

Next, based on the round count value, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round to end is the round for opening the lower special winning opening (step S348). Then, when it is determined that it is a round to open the lower big winning opening (step S348; YES), the value of the probability variable area solenoid control code is set to "3" which is a value corresponding to the probability variable area control execution process (Step S349).

After executing the processing of step S350, or when it is determined that it is not the round to open the lower big winning opening in the processing of step S348 (step S348; NO), the value of the special figure process flag is changed to the jackpot open post-processing. After updating to "6" which is a corresponding value (step S352), the process during big hit opening is complete|finished.

FIG. 8-10 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S116 of FIG. 8-3 as the process after opening the jackpot. In the process after opening the jackpot shown in FIG. 8-10, the CPU 103 first updates the interval timer value so that 1 is subtracted (step S361). At this time, it is determined whether or not the updated interval timer value has become "0" (step S362). Then, when the interval timer value is other than "0" (step S362; NO), the process after opening the jackpot is terminated.

When the interval timer value is "0" at step S362 (step S362; YES), it is determined whether or not the round count value has reached the upper limit round count value (step S363). Then, if the round count value is less than the upper limit round count value (step S363; NO), after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "4" which is the value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step S364) , end the jackpot opening post-processing. Thus, until it is determined that the round count value is the upper limit round count value by the processing of step S363, by repeatedly executing the processing of steps S115 to S116 in FIG. can be run multiple rounds with the

When it is determined in step S363 that the round count value is the upper limit round count value (step S363; YES), the ending effect time corresponding to the jackpot type is set (step S366). At this time, the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off.

8-11 are diagrams showing the ending time table. Referring to FIGS. 8-11, as shown in FIGS. 8-11(A) and 8-11(B), when the first hit occurs in the low base state, and in the high base state, the big win occurs. The ending performance time is set in advance according to the type of the big hit for the time of consecutive chances.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 8-11, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting to the effect control board 12 a jackpot end designation command capable of specifying the ending effect time corresponding to the jackpot type (step S367). . After that, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "7" which is the value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (step S368), the jackpot opening post-processing is ended. The CPU 103 may count the number of continuations of the time saving state, make it possible to specify the EXT data of the jackpot end designation command, etc., and notify the performance control board 12 of the number of times of the continuation of the time saving state.

FIG. 8-12 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S117 of FIG. 8-3 as the jackpot end processing. In the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 8-12, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed (step S381). As an example, in the processing of step S365 in the jackpot opening post-processing shown in FIG. 8-10, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the ending effect time is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S381, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and whether or not the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapse determination value Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed. When the ending effect time has not elapsed in step S381 (step S381; NO), the big hit ending process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the ending effect time has elapsed in step S381 (step S381; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the passage flag is ON (step S382). Here, the passage flag is a flag that is set to ON state when the probability variable region switch 24A detects passage of the game ball to the probability variable region.

When the passage flag is ON in step S382 (step S382; YES), the variable probability control is started to set the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the variable probability state (step S383). As an example, in the process of step S383, in addition to setting the variable probability flag to the ON state, the initial count value corresponding to the upper limit number of times of the special game that can be executed in the variable probability state is set in the variable probability counter. . After that, the passage flag is reset to be turned off (step S384). In addition, in the process of step S383, the setting for starting the time reduction control which average variable display time becomes shorter than a normal state may be performed.

After executing the process of step S384, or when the passage flag is not turned on in the process of step S382 (step S382; NO), setting for starting the high base control is performed (step S385). As an example, in the process of step S385, the time saving flag and the advantageous state flag are set to ON state, and the predetermined count initial value corresponding to the upper limit value of the special game that can be executed in the time saving state is set. , It should be set to the special figure fluctuation counter.

After executing the process of step S385, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "0" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S386), the jackpot ending process is terminated.

FIG. 8-13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In this production control process processing, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the production process flag provided in the production control flag setting section. . Among the descriptions of these processes, descriptions similar to those described with reference to FIG. 7 will not be repeated.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, when the win start designation command is received, if the win start designation command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the jackpot start processing. do. In addition, when the performance control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the value of the presentation process flag is the initial value. Update to "0".

The jackpot start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this jackpot start process, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot game state on the image display device 5 after the variable display time is over. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "5", which is the value corresponding to the in-round process.

The in-round process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this in-round process, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control during the round. Then, when the round end condition is met, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "6" corresponding to the round post-processing. If the final round has ended, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7" which is the value corresponding to the process after the end of the jackpot.

The post-round processing of step S176 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this round post-processing, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is established, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "5", which is the value corresponding to the in-round process.

The process after the end of the jackpot in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "7". In this process after the end of the big win, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control in the image display device 5 to notify the player that the big win game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process.

FIG. 8-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the special figure per waiting process executed in step S173 of FIG. 8-13. In the special figure per waiting process shown in FIG. 8-14, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a symbol confirmation designation command has been received (step S720). When there is no reception of the symbol decision specified command (step S720; NO), the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

When the pattern confirmation designation command is received (step S720; YES), the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the confirmed decorative pattern (step S722). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the confirmed decorative symbol is a big hit symbol (step S723). When the determined decoration pattern is not a big hit pattern (step S723: NO), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step S726), and the special figure per waiting process is performed. exit.

When the determined decorative symbol is a big hit symbol (step S723: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning start designation command has been received (step S730). When there is no reception of the hit start designation command (step S730; NO), the special figure hit waiting process is terminated.

When the hit start designation command is received (step S730; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets a fanfare effect as described later with reference to FIGS. A value is set (step S733B), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" (step S734) corresponding to the jackpot start process (step S174), and the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

FIG. 8-15 is a flow chart showing the details of the jackpot start process executed in step S174 of FIG. 8-13. In the jackpot start process shown in FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a command for notifying that the big winning opening is open is received (step S741). Here, the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening is a command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state.

When the large winning opening opening notification command is not received (step S741; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the fanfare effect execution process shown in FIG. 8-16 (step S742), and ends the jackpot start process. . As an example, in the process of step S742, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1, and the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data n. For example, in the image display device 5, along with displaying the big win display pattern, an effect of displaying letters, characters, etc. indicating that a big win has occurred is executed. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out, and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data, and switches to the process data set next in the process table. , sets the process timer set value in the next process data to the process timer and starts the process timer.

When the command for notifying that the big winning opening is open is received (step S741; YES), the setting for starting the effect during the big win is performed (step S743). As an example, in the processing of step S743, an in-round effect is selected based on the contents of the command for notifying that the big winning opening is open, then a process table corresponding to the in-round effect is selected, and a process timer is started.

Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" corresponding to the in-round process (step S744), and then the big hit start process is terminated.

FIG. 8-16 is a flowchart showing an example of fanfare effect execution processing. Referring to FIG. 8-16, effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the fanfare effect time timer value (step 069FS111). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fanfare effect time timer value has reached 0 (step 069FS112).

When determining that the fanfare effect time timer value has not reached 0 (NO at step 069FS112), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is time to start the fanfare effect time (step 069FS113).

When it is determined that it is time to start the fanfare effect time (YES in step 069FS113), the effect control CPU 120 selects the notification effect according to the jackpot type and the number of consecutive wins (step 069FS114), and starts the jackpot type suggestion display. (Step 069FS115). The notification effect is a effect for notifying the type of effect to be executed in the big hit round. The jackpot type suggestion display is a display for suggesting the jackpot type.

If it is determined that it is not the time to start the fanfare effect time (NO at step 069FS113), and after step 069FS115, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is time to start the notification effect (step 069FS121). The start time of the notification effect is predetermined for each fanfare effect time. For example, when the fanfare effect time is 13 seconds and 20 seconds, the time is 5 seconds and 7 seconds from the start of the fanfare effect time. is.

When it is determined that it is time to start the notification effect (YES in step 069FS121), the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the notification effect selected based on the jackpot type (step 069FS122).

If it is determined that it is not the time to start the notification effect (NO in step 069FS121), and after step 069FS122, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the started notification effect is a notification effect that accepts the player's selection. is determined (step 069FS123). If it is determined that it is the notification effect for accepting the player's selection (YES at step 069FS123), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the selection acceptable period for the notification effect (step 069FS124).

When it is determined that it is the selection acceptable period (YES at step 069FS124), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection has been accepted (step 069FS125). When it is determined that the selection has been accepted (YES at step 069FS125), the effect control CPU 120 sets the accepted content as the effect content for the big hit round (step 069FS126).

If it is determined that it is not the notification effect for accepting the player's selection (NO at step 069FS123), if it is determined that it is not the selection acceptable period (NO at step 069FS124), it is determined that the selection is not accepted (NO at step 069FS125) In this case, and after step 069FS126, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the caller of this fanfare effect execution process.

FIGS. 8-17 are timing charts showing an example of a fanfare effect. Referring to FIG. 8-17, the setting of the fanfare effect executed in step S733A of FIG. 8-14 includes the following. If the winning start designation command received in step S730 is a command indicating a 6R normal jackpot, 13 seconds is set as the fanfare effect time in step 733A as shown in FIG. ) is set so that the effect indicated by ) is executed.

FIG. 8-17(A) shows a timing chart when the 6R normal jackpot is determined. First, during the first five seconds of the fanfare production time, the jackpot type suggestive display is executed. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like indicating that the jackpot type is the 6R normal jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5 .

In eight seconds from the 5th second to the 13th second of the fanfare performance time, the big hit type notification performance is executed as the notification performance. The jackpot type notification effect is a effect for notifying the confirmed jackpot type. Right-handed information is displayed on the image display device 5 during and after the execution of the jackpot type suggestion display and the jackpot type notification effect.

If the hit start designation command received in step S730 is a command indicating a 6R probability variable jackpot, in step 733A, as shown in FIG. ) Or determine by lottery which of the effects shown in FIG. 8-17(C) is decided to be executed at a rate), and the effect data is set so that the determined effect is executed.

FIG. 8-17(B) shows a first timing chart when the 6R probability variable jackpot is determined. First, during the first five seconds of the fanfare production time, the jackpot type suggestive display is executed. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like indicating that the jackpot type is the 6R normal jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5 .

In eight seconds from the 5th second to the 13th second of the fanfare production time, a round promotion production is executed as a notification production. The round promotion effect is a effect that makes it appear as if the player has been promoted from a low-advantage jackpot to a high-advantage jackpot. During and after the execution of the jackpot type suggestion display and the round promotion effect, the image display device 5 displays the right-handed notification.

FIG. 8-17(C) shows a second timing chart when the 6R probability variable jackpot is determined. First, during the first five seconds of the fanfare production time, the jackpot type suggestive display is executed. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like indicating that the jackpot type is a 6R probability variable jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5 .

During the 6 seconds from the 5th second to the 11th second of the fanfare effect time, the music selection effect is executed as the notification effect. The song selection effect is an effect of selecting a song to be output during the big hit. In two seconds from the 11th second to the 13th second of the fanfare effect time, the special right hitting notification is executed. The above-mentioned right-handed notification is executed by displaying a small "right-handed" in the upper right part of the image display device 5, while the special right-handed notification is performed by displaying a large "right-handed" in the center of the image display device 5. It is executed by displaying "Beat". The image display device 5 displays the right-handed notification during and after the execution of the jackpot type suggestion display, music selection effect, and special right-handed notification.

If the hit start designation command received in step S730 is a command indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot, in step 733A, as shown in FIG. ) is set so that the effect indicated by ) is executed.

FIG. 8-17(D) shows a timing chart when the 16R probability variable jackpot is determined. First, in the first seven seconds of the fanfare production time, the jackpot type suggestive display is executed. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like indicating that the jackpot type is a 16R probability variable jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5 .

During 13 seconds from the 7th second to the 20th second of the fanfare production time, music selection production is executed as the notification production. The image display device 5 displays the hitting to the right notification during and after the execution of the jackpot type suggestion display and the music selection effect.

FIG. 8-18 is a screen transition diagram showing the flow of the fanfare effect. With reference to FIG. 8-18, in the production for the 6R probability variable jackpot shown in FIG. 8-17(B), as shown in FIG. The image display device 5 displays an image including characters “C big hit” indicating that After that, as shown in FIGS. 8-18(B) and 8-18(C), as a result of the execution of the round promotion effect, an image containing the characters "B jackpot" indicating that the 6R probability variable jackpot is won. is displayed on the image display device 5 .

In addition, in the production in the case of the 16R probability variable big hit shown in FIG. 8-17 (D), as shown in FIG. An image including the characters “big hit” is displayed on the image display device 5 . After that, as shown in FIGS. 8-18(E) and 8-18(F), a song selection effect is executed, and as a result of accepting the player's selection by operating the stick controller 31A, the selected jackpot is selected. The image display device 5 displays an image including characters indicating that the song inside is “song G”.

In the case of the 16R probability variable big hit, as shown in FIG. number (for example, 3 songs). As shown in FIGS. 8-17 (C) and (D), there are more music options for the 16R probability variable jackpot than for the 6R probability variable jackpot. can make it easier for users to select songs.

In addition, when the big hits are played consecutively, music choices for the 16R probability variable big hits can be added. The number of options for the first hit may be less than, the same as, or more than the number of options for the 6R probability variable jackpot.

Also, when the selected music is output, a video is also displayed.

FIG. 8-19 is a flow chart showing the details of the in-round processing executed in step S175 of FIG. 8-13. In the in-round process shown in FIG. 8-19, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a designation command after opening the big winning opening is received (step S751). When the designated command is not received after the opening of the special winning opening (step S751; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for controlling the effect operation which is a round effect corresponding to the number of rounds (step S752), Ending effect selection second processing shown in FIG. 8-20 to be described later is executed (step S752A). As an example, in the process of step S752, 1 is subtracted from the value of the process timer, and control of the effect device is executed according to the content of the process data n. For example, in the image display device 5, along with displaying the jackpot display pattern, an effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like is executed. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out, and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data, and switches to the process data set next in the process table. , sets the process timer set value in the next process data to the process timer and starts the process timer.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the "second jackpot" by, for example, reading the EXT data in the command for notifying that the big prize opening is open transmitted from the main board 11 ( step S753).

When the jackpot type is not the "second jackpot" at step S753 (step S753; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the round process.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the "second jackpot" at step S753 (step 753; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the probability variation confirmation command is received from the main board 11 (step S754). . Here, the probability variable confirmation command is a command for notifying that the probability variable region switch 24A is turned on and it is determined that the probability variable state is established.

When the variable probability confirmation command is received in step S754 (step S754; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs winning effect control setting (step S755). For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes, as the winning effect control setting, a winning effect indicating that the game ball has won the variable probability region.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the winning flag indicating that the game ball has won in the variable probability area during the round game (step S756).

If the variable probability confirmation command is not received in step S754 (step S754; NO), or after executing the process of step S756, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the setting for starting the instruction effect is performed. is determined (step S757). Here, the instruction performance is a performance for instructing the player to shoot the game ball to the lower special variable winning ball device 7B.

If the setting for starting the instruction effect (instruction effect start setting) is performed in step S757 (step S757; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs the instruction effect control setting (step S758). For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes an instruction effect as the instruction effect control setting.

If the setting for starting the instruction effect in step S757 (instruction effect start setting) is not performed (step S757; NO), or after the process of step S758 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 starts the notification effect. It is determined whether or not the setting for starting (setting for start of notification effect) is performed (step S759). Here, the notification effect is an effect for notifying that the game ball has passed through the variable probability area.

If the setting for starting the notification effect in step S759 (the notification effect start setting) is performed (step S759; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs the notification effect control setting. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the notification effect as the notification effect control setting.

If the setting for starting the notification effect in step S759 (notification effect start setting) is not performed (step S759; NO), or after executing the process of step S759, the effect control CPU 120 performs the round process. exit.

When the command after opening the large winning opening is received in step S751 (step S751; YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for starting the interval effect based on the content of the command after opening the big winning hole. (step S761). Here, the interval effect is a effect that performs interval display according to the number of rounds. Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the set interval effect and starts a process timer.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "6" corresponding to the post-round processing (step S762), and ends the mid-round processing.

FIG. 8-21 is a flow chart showing the details of the post-round processing executed in step S176 of FIG. 8-13. In the round post-processing shown in FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a hit end designation command is received (step S771). Here, the hit end designation command is a command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big win game state. When the winning end command has not been received (step S771; NO), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the notification command during opening of the big winning opening is received (step S772).

When the notification command during opening of the big winning opening is not received (step S772; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for controlling the effect operation to be the interval effect corresponding to the number of rounds (step S773). . As an example, in the process of step S773, 1 is subtracted from the value of the process timer, and control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data n. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out, and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data, and switches to the process data set next in the process table. , sets the process timer set value in the next process data to the process timer and starts the process timer.

When the large winning opening opening command is received (step S772; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for ending the effect operation which is an interval effect corresponding to the number of rounds (step S774). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the "second jackpot" by, for example, reading the EXT data in the command for notifying that the big prize opening is open transmitted from the main board 11 ( step S775). At this time, if the jackpot type is the "second jackpot" (step S775; YES), for example, by reading the EXT data in the command for notifying that the jackpot is open, which is transmitted from the main board 11, the following It is determined whether or not there are 9 rounds (step S776).

When the next round is the ninth round in step S776 (step S776; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the instruction effect (instruction effect start setting) (step S777). As an example, in the process of step S777, a process table corresponding to the instruction effect is selected, and the process timer is started.

On the other hand, if the next round is not the 9th round in step S776 (step S776; NO), the effect control CPU 120, for example, reads the EXT data in the large winning opening open notification command transmitted from the main board 11. determines whether or not the next round is the 10th round (step S778).

When the next round is the 10th round in step S778 (step S778; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning flag is set to ON (step S779).

When the prize winning flag is set to the ON state at step S779 (step S779; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the notification effect (notification effect start setting) (step S780). As an example, in the processing of step S780, a process table corresponding to the notification effect is selected and a process timer is started.

If the jackpot type is not "second jackpot" at step S775 (step S775; NO), if the next round is not 10 rounds at step S778 (step S778; NO), or the winning flag is ON at step S779 (step S779; NO), it is determined whether the next round is one of 13R to 16R (step S783).

If the next round is one of 13R to 16R (step S783; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first ending effect selection process shown in FIG. 8-20 which will be described later.

If the next round is neither 13R to 16R (step S783; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the effect operation which is a round effect corresponding to the number of rounds (step S781). As an example, in the process of step S781, a process table corresponding to the round effect is selected, and the process timer is started.

After executing the process of step S777, after executing the process of step S780, after executing the process of step S781, or after executing the process of step S784, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect process flag. The value is updated to "5" corresponding to the mid-round process (step S782), and the post-round process ends.

When the hit end command is received in the process of step S771 (S771; YES), the ending effect is set as described later in FIG. 8-25 (step S782A), and the ending effect time timer value is set. Then (step S782B), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the big hit post-processing (step S781), and the round post-processing is terminated.

FIG. 8-20 is a flow chart showing the ending effect selection first process and second process. Referring to FIG. 8-20, in the first ending effect selection process, effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the next round is one of 13R to 15R (step 069FS131). If it is determined to be one of 13R to 15R (YES in step 069FS131), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not selection of the type of ending effect has been received (step 069FS132).

When it is determined that the selection of the type of ending effect has not been received (YES at step 069FS132), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the ending effect selection acceptance display (step 069FS133).

If it is determined that the next round is none of the 13R to 15R (NO at step 069FS131), if it is determined that the selection of the ending effect has been accepted (NO at step 069FS132), and after step 069FS133, the effect The control CPU 120 determines whether or not the next round is 16R (step 069FS134).

When it is determined to be 16R (step 069FS134), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not selection of the type of ending effect has been received (step 069FS135). When it is determined that the selection of the ending effect has been accepted (NO at step 069FS135), the setting for starting the effect of announcing the accepted type of ending effect as the ending effect to be executed is performed (step 069FS136).

When it is determined that the selection of the type of ending effect has not been received (YES in step 069FS135), the effect control CPU 120 starts the effect of notifying the ending effect of the type automatically selected by lottery as the ending effect to be executed. settings are made (step 069FS137).

If it is determined that the next round is not 16R (NO at step 069FS134), after step 069FS136 and after step 069FS137, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the caller of this process.

In the second ending effect selection process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the current round is one of 13R to 15R (step 069FS141). When it is determined that it is one of 13R to 15R (YES in step 069FS141), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for controlling the ending effect selection acceptance display (step 069FS142).

When it is determined that the current round is neither 13R to 15R (NO in step 069FS141), and after step 069FS142, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect selection acceptance display is being displayed. (step 069FS143). When it is determined that it is being displayed (YES at step 069FS143), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not selection of the type of ending effect has been accepted (step 069FS144).

When determining that the selection of the type of ending effect has been accepted (YES at step 069FS144), effect control CPU 120 sets the accepted type of ending effect as the ending effect to be executed (step 069FS145).

If it is determined that the ending effect selection acceptance display is not being displayed (NO at step 069FS143), if it is determined that the selection of the type of ending effect has not been accepted (NO at step 069FS144), and after step 069FS145, the effect The control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current round is 16R (step 069FS146). 16R (YES at step 069FS146), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for controlling the effect of notifying the ending effect to be executed (step 069FS147).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current round is not 16R (NO at step 069FS146), and after step 069FS147, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the caller of this process.

FIG. 8-22 is a flow chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot executed in step S177 of FIG. 8-13. In the process after the end of the big hit shown in FIG. 8-22, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the ending effect time timer value (step S770), and determines whether the ending effect time timer value has become 0 ( step S771). That is, it is determined whether or not the ending effect time timer has timed out (whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed). When the ending effect time timer value is not 0 (step S771; NO), the ending effect execution process shown in FIG. 8-23 described later is executed (step S772), and the process after the end of the jackpot ends. When the ending effect time timer value becomes 0 (step S771; YES), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step S773), and the jackpot ends. Finish post-processing.

FIG. 8-23 is a flow chart showing an example of an ending effect execution process. Referring to FIG. 8-23, effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the ending effect time timer value (step 069FS151). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect time timer value has become 0 (step 069FS152).

When determining that the ending effect time timer value has not reached 0 (NO at step 069FS152), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect time (step 069FS153).

When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect time (YES in step 069FS153), the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the set type of ending effect. (Step 069FS154).

If it is determined that it is not the time to start the ending effect time (NO at step 069FS153), and after step 069FS154, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the ending effect being executed is an ending effect that accepts the player's selection. It is determined whether or not (step 069FS156). If it is determined that it is the ending effect that accepts the player's selection (YES at step 069FS156), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the selection acceptable period for the ending effect (step 069FS157).

When it is determined that it is the selection acceptable period (YES at step 069FS157), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection has been accepted (step 069FS158). When it is determined that the selection has been accepted (YES at step 069FS158), the effect control CPU 120 sets the accepted content as the effect content after the big hit (step 069FS159).

If it is determined that it is not the ending effect that accepts the player's selection (NO at step 069FS156), if it is determined that it is not the selection acceptable period (NO at step 069FS157), it is determined that the selection is not accepted (NO at step 069FS158). In this case, and after step 069FS159, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the caller of this ending effect execution process.

FIG. 8-24 is a screen transition diagram showing the flow of selecting the type of ending effect. Referring to FIG. 8-24, in FIG. 8-24 (A), by executing the processing shown in FIG. 8-20, the current round number and characters indicating the total number of winning balls in the jackpot, an image including characters urging the player to select the type of effect at the ending, and the type of effect at the ending An image including characters of options is displayed on the image display device 5 . While this screen is displayed, the player can select the type of ending effect by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. If the push button 31B is not operated before the end of the selectable period of 15 rounds, the type of option in the selected state is selected as the type of effect at the ending.

Next, in FIG. 8-24(A), by executing the processing shown in FIG. The image display device 5 displays an image including characters indicating the type of the selected ending effect in addition to the characters indicating the cumulative number of obtained balls.

FIG. 8-25 is a timing chart showing an example of an ending effect. Referring to FIG. 8-25, FIG. 8-25(A) shows the case where the ending effect of effect pattern A is executed at the first hit. At the time of the first hit, the performance pattern A is automatically selected. The production pattern A is an ending production production pattern in which the contents of the beginning, middle and end of the production contents in the high base state after the big win are selected.

When the round of big wins ends and the ending performance time starts, first, an introduction performance indicating that the ending performance starts is executed for 2 seconds from the 0th second to the 2nd second. The next five seconds from the second second to the seventh second is a selection period A for selecting the contents of the performance in the opening stage among the contents of the performance after the big win, and the selection of the contents of the performance in the opening stage is received from the player. is executed.

Similarly, during the 5 seconds from the 7th to the 12th seconds and the 5 seconds from the 12th to the 17th seconds, the contents of the middle stage and the final stage are respectively selected from the contents of the performance after the big hit. During the selection period B and the selection period C, an effect is executed in which the player selects the content of the effect in the middle stage and the end stage, respectively.

During the next 3 seconds from the 17th second to the 20th second, an effect of displaying the result selected in the selection period A to the selection period C is executed. For three seconds from the 20th second to the 23rd second, an introductory effect indicating that the variable probability mode starts is executed. For five seconds from the 23rd second to the 28th second, the image display device 5 displays a warning display including a display for preventing the player from forgetting to take out the prepaid card and a display for preventing the player from becoming absorbed in the game. A company logo indicating the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1 is displayed on the image display device 5 for four seconds from the 28th second to the 32nd second. For two seconds from the 32nd second to the 34th second of the ending performance time, a probability variable mode entering performance indicating entering into the probability variable mode is executed.

FIG. 8-25(B) shows the case where the ending effect of the effect pattern A is executed during consecutive chances. At the time of consecutive chances, the player can select the type of ending performance to be executed during the ending performance time from the 13th round to the 16th round of the jackpot.

When the round of big wins ends and the ending performance time starts, first, an introduction performance indicating that the ending performance starts is executed for 2 seconds from the 0th second to the 2nd second. The next 10 seconds from the 2nd second to the 12th second is a selection period A for selecting the contents of the performance in the opening stage from the contents of the performance after the big hit, and the selection of the contents of the performance in the opening stage is received from the player. is executed.

Similarly, for 10 seconds from the 12th second to the 22nd second and for 10 seconds from the 22nd second to the 32nd second, the contents of the middle stage and the final stage are respectively selected from the contents of the performance after the big win. During the selection period B and the selection period C, an effect is executed in which the player selects the content of the effect in the middle stage and the end stage, respectively.

During the next 5 seconds from the 32nd to 37th seconds, an effect of displaying the results selected in the selection periods A to C is executed. For 5 seconds from the 37th second to the 42nd second, an introductory effect indicating that the variable probability mode starts is executed. For three seconds from the last 42nd second to the 45th second of the ending performance time, a probability variable mode entering performance indicating entering into the probability variable mode is executed.

In addition, in the case where effect pattern E is selected from effect pattern B, among the ending effects of effect pattern A shown in FIG. From the performance pattern B to the performance pattern E, different performances are changed. Although the length of the performance of the part with the player's intervention element included in the performance pattern A to the performance pattern E is different, the length of the big hit pattern is displayed in the probability change mode entry performance, and the ending performance time is made equal. adjusted to

FIG. 8-26 is a screen transition diagram showing the flow of the ending effect. 8-26, when effect pattern A is selected, the screen shown in FIG. 8-26(A) is displayed on image display device 5 during selection period A. FIG. The screen shown in FIG. 8-26(A) includes an image including characters for prompting the user to select the effect contents in the opening stage and characters indicating options from the effect contents after the big hit.

After the selection period A, the screens shown in FIGS. 8-26B and 8-26C are displayed on the image display device 5 in the selection period B and the selection period C, respectively. The screens shown in FIGS. 8-26 (B) and (C) each include an image including characters indicating selection of middle stage and end stage effects and characters indicating options among the effect contents after the big hit. be

After the selection period C, the screen shown in FIG. 8-26(D) is displayed on the image display device 5 during the selection result display period. The screen shown in FIG. 8-26(D) includes an image including characters indicating selection results of the beginning, middle, and end of the performance contents after the big win.

Production pattern B executes a predetermined game (here, Amidakuji game) that requires the player's operation (here, selection of options), and depending on the game result, can be output during a high base state after a big win. This is an effect pattern of an ending effect that changes the number of songs that can be selected by the player among the songs. 8-26 (E) and 8-26 (F ), an effect for running the Amidakuji game is executed.

The screen shown in FIG. 8-26(E) includes an image of the first half of the Amidakuji, characters of options at the starting point of the Amidakuji, characters prompting the player to select an option, and characters following the path of the Amidakuji. Contains images. After the option is selected by the player and the image of the character starts to move from the selected start point along the path of the amidakuji, the screen of FIG. 8-26(F) is displayed.

The screen shown in FIG. 8-26(F) includes an image of the latter half of the Amidakuji, characters indicating the game result of the goal of the Amidakuji, and an image of a character who has reached the goal by following the route of the Amidakuji. . Depending on the result of the game, the number of songs that the player can select from among the songs that can be output during the high base state after the big win is changed. For example, as a result of the Amidakuji game, if the player reaches the goal point of "add two songs", two songs are added to the number of songs that can be selected by the player. When reaching the "lost" goal point, the number of songs that can be selected by the player remains the same.

In addition, the total number of songs that can be output during the high base state, which is stored in advance in the pachinko game machine 1, is ten. At the time of the first hit, two songs can be selected. After that, as a result of selection of effect pattern B in the ending effect period of the big win of consecutive wins, the number of songs indicated by the result of the game to be executed is added. When the number of selectable songs reaches the total number of songs (here, 10 songs), effect pattern B becomes unselectable. After effect pattern B becomes unselectable, effect pattern E, which will be described later, can be selected in place of effect pattern B.

In production pattern C, a predetermined game (here, a card game) that requires the player's operation (here, selection of options) is executed, and depending on the result of the game, the setting value shown in the modified example is suggested as an ending. It is a production pattern of production. If it is configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and is configured to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set set value, the set value The proportion controlled to the advantageous state differs accordingly. Since the player expects to be controlled in an advantageous state, the player can be made to pay attention to the ending effect by executing the ending effect suggesting the set value. 8-26 (G) and 8-26 (H ), an effect for executing a card game is executed.

The screen shown in FIG. 8-26(G) includes an image of playing card options and text prompting the player to select an option. After the option is selected by the player and the action of flipping the selected card is executed, the screen of FIG. 8-26(H) is displayed.

The screen shown in FIG. 8-26(H) includes an image of unselected playing card options and an image of a playing card that is selected and flipped over and has an image suggesting a set value. . A set value is suggested according to the content of the playing card image (for example, the content of characters, the type of character). For example, in the case of the characters "Settings may be good", it is suggested that the setting value is likely to be a high setting value. It also indicates that the set value is likely to be a high set value for a specific type of character. It should be noted that the effect pattern C cannot be selected during consecutive games when the setting suggestion is executed.

The performance pattern D is a mini-game requiring the player's operation, suggesting whether or not there is a pending memory determined to be a big hit among the currently stored pending memories (so-called pending series). It is an effect pattern of the ending effect that executes the effect. When the effect pattern D is selected, instead of the effect of displaying the selection period A to the selection period C and the selection result shown in FIG. 8-25, the effect of executing the mini game of the effect pattern D is executed. .

Effect pattern E is a selection pattern that can be selected after all songs can be selected in effect pattern B, or after the number of consecutive wins reaches a specific number (for example, 15 times). This is an effect pattern of an ending effect in which an image that is not normally displayed (for example, a premium image) is displayed when the game succeeds as a result of executing a predetermined required mini-game. As shown in (A) of FIG. 8-24, the options of the effect pattern E are displayed in a non-selectable state, but are displayed in a manner indicating that they are non-selectable and are in a selectable state. After that, it is displayed in a manner indicating that it can be selected.

(Regarding the modified example of the characteristic portion 069F)
(1) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 to 8-25, etc., the type of ending effect is before the ending effect during the big hit (for example, from 13th round to 16th round). selected. However, it is not limited to this, and the type of ending effect may be selected during the ending effect.

FIG. 8-27 is a timing chart showing an example of an ending effect in the modified example. With reference to FIG. 8-27, in the above-described embodiment, the effect of selecting the effect pattern of the ending effect, which is executed before the ending effect during the big win, is performed at the 0th second of the ending effect time. 10 seconds from to the 10th second. The effect executed after that is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 8-25(B).

(2) As described above, in the first half of the ending effect, the type of effect to be executed in the latter half may be selected as a related effect related to the effect to be executed in the latter half.

However, it is not limited to this, and as a related effect, an explanation effect (for example, explanation of how to play) for the effect (for example, mini game effect) executed in the second half period may be executed, or the second half period You may make it perform the introduction production|presentation of the production|presentation performed by . Also, in this case, the shorter ending rendering time may have only the latter half period without the first half period.

Also, in this case, if the same performance pattern is repeatedly selected during a series of big wins, the first half period may be shortened and the second half period may be lengthened. Alternatively, the first half period may be shortened, the second half period may be the same length, and the performance for time adjustment may be executed in the remaining period. This allows the player to have the illusion that the ending period has been shortened.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), steps S269 and S270 in FIG. 8-6, and FIG. A longer time is selected as the fanfare performance time at a higher rate than the probability variable jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot. In addition, a longer time is selected as the fanfare presentation time at a higher rate in the case of the big win of the re-chance than in the case of the big win of the first time. In addition, the ratio of the fanfare production time that is longer in the case of being controlled to be a big hit as a result of the variable display of the second special pattern is higher than in the case of being controlled to be a big win as a result of the variable display of the first special pattern. to select.

However, as described above, if the fanfare effect time is to be determined, it may be determined by other methods. Here, in the former case, a long time is selected as the fanfare production time at a rate of 0%, and in the latter case, a long time is selected as the fanfare production time at a rate of 100%. However, other ratios may be used as long as the ratio of the latter is higher than the ratio of the former.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), steps S366 and S367 in FIG. 8-10, and FIG. A longer time is selected as the ending presentation time at a higher rate than the probability variable jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot. In addition, a long time is selected as the ending performance time at a higher rate for the big hit of the re-chance than when the big hit is the first hit. In addition, the ratio of the length of the ending effect time to the long ending production time is higher in the case of being controlled to be a big win as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol than in the case of being controlled to be a big win as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol. to select.

However, as described above, if the ending rendering time is to be determined, it may be determined by other methods. Here, in the former case, a long time is selected as the ending effect time at a rate of 0%, and in the latter case, a long time is selected as the ending effect time at a rate of 100%. However, other ratios may be used as long as the ratio of the latter is higher than the ratio of the former.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, the effect pattern A to effect pattern E of the ending effect include a player's intervention element (for example, an effect that causes the player to operate the operation unit). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of the production patterns may not include the player's intervention element. For example, production pattern E is a production pattern that does not include a mini-game that requires the player's operation, and is an ending production in which an image that is not normally displayed (for example, a premium image) is displayed without the player's operation. It may be a performance pattern.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, there is no limit to the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state. However, it is not limited to this, and a limit may be provided in which the number of consecutive times of the variable probability state is set to a predetermined limit number of times. In this case, the effect pattern of the ending effect may include an effect pattern including a mini-game effect suggesting the remaining number of times up to the predetermined limit number of times of the variable probability state.

(7) A common effect may be provided in which it is difficult or impossible to determine whether the effect during the high base state after the big hit is the variable probability state or the non-variable probability state. In this case, the effect pattern of the ending effect may include an effect pattern including a mini-game effect indicating whether or not the variable probability state will occur after the big win.

(8) At the start of the ending effect time, the movable body 32 may be operated to perform the effect of appealing to the player the number of prize balls obtained during the big win, and then the above-described ending effect may be executed. . As a result, the ending effect can be lengthened by the operation period of the movable body 32 .

(9) For a special big win (for example, a big win when the number of consecutive wins reaches 20), a special image may be displayed without executing the aforementioned ending effect. This special image may be displayed from the start of the big win fanfare production period, after the end of the fanfare production period, or from the start of the ending production period. can be In this way, the ending effect described above may not be executed when a special condition is met.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-11, the 6R normal jackpot and the 6R variable variable jackpot have the same ending effect time, and as shown in FIG. , The ending production of the same time allocation was made to be executed. However, it is not limited to this, and in the 6R normal jackpot, the selection period for the performance after the big win may not be provided, and the ending performance time may be shorter than in the 6R variable variable jackpot.

(11) FIGS. 8-26(A) to 8-26(C) show options for the contents of the effect after the big hit. With regard to this option, the 16R probability variable jackpot may have more options than the 6R probability variable jackpot. Alternatively, the number of choices may be increased as the number of consecutive chances is increased. As shown in FIG. 8-25, at the time of the 16R probability variable jackpot or consecutive wins, the selection period A to the selection period C is lengthened. It becomes easy to select the contents of the production.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 069F)
(1-1-1) A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1) controllable to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16-round big win, variable probability big win) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6-round big win, normal big win) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Any controllable game state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100),
End effect selection means (for example, ending effect time) for the first advantageous state to select a longer period as the end effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate than the second advantageous state For example, game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8-11),
End effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 8-22, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26) capable of executing end effect (for example, ending effect) during the end effect period and
The end effect execution means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end effect (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect period of the first advantageous state,
A termination performance capable of accepting from a player a selection of a termination performance to be executed by said termination performance executing means from among a plurality of types of termination performance executable during said termination performance period of said first advantageous state. Receiving means (for example, effect control CPU120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 8-19, FIG. 8-20, Step in FIG. 8-21 S784 The period during which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the end effect period or the second half of the big win round. It may be a period from when the end command of 16R is received until the end command of 16R is received.).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect to be executed at the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest in the game due to the delay due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-1-2) Controllable to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, high A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to the base state),
A normal state (for example, a normal state), the special state, a first advantageous state (for example, a 16-round big hit, a probability variable big hit) as the advantageous state, and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. a game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, a 6-round jackpot, a normal jackpot);
The case of being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the normal state (for example, the case of a so-called first big hit) is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the special state. (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive big hit), the end effect selection means (for example, Game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8-11),
End effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 8-22, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26) capable of executing end effect (for example, ending effect) during the end effect period and
The end effect execution means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end effect (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect period of the first advantageous state,
A termination performance capable of accepting from a player a selection of a termination performance to be executed by said termination performance executing means from among a plurality of types of termination performance executable during said termination performance period of said first advantageous state. Receiving means (for example, effect control CPU120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 8-19, FIG. 8-20, Step in FIG. 8-21 S784.).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect to be executed at the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest in the game due to the delay due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-1-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information (for example, first special symbol) more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, the variable display of the second special symbol) can be executed, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and after the end of the advantageous state, a special state ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability variable state, a time saving state, a high base state),
First reservation storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to variable display of the first special identification information as first reservation storage information (for example, first reservation storage);
Second reservation storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information on variable display of the second special identification information as second reservation storage information (for example, second reservation storage);
variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information when both the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are stored; Variable display control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 8-4) that executes with priority over display,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16-round big win, variable probability big win) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6-round big win, normal big win) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Any controllable game state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100),
The advantageous state is controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information rather than the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. End effect selection means (eg, game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8- 11) and
End effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 8-22, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26) capable of executing end effect (for example, ending effect) during the end effect period and
The end effect execution means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end effect (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect period of the first advantageous state,
A termination performance capable of accepting from a player a selection of a termination performance to be executed by said termination performance executing means from among a plurality of types of termination performance executable during said termination performance period of said first advantageous state. Receiving means (for example, effect control CPU120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 8-19, FIG. 8-20, Step in FIG. 8-21 S784.).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect to be executed at the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest in the game due to the delay due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-2-1) A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1) controllable to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16-round big win, variable probability big win) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6-round big win, normal big win) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Any controllable game state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100),
End effect selection means (e.g., a game control microcomputer) for selecting a longer period as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous state in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state at a higher rate. 100, step S366 in FIGS. 8-10, FIGS. 8-11);
End effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 8-22, FIG. 8-23 to FIG. 8-26) capable of executing end effect during the end effect period,
The end effect execution means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end effect (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect period of the first advantageous state,
Each of the plurality of types of end effects that can be executed during the end effect period of the first advantageous state includes a player's intervention element (for example, operation of stick controller 31A or push button 31B) (for example, effect pattern All of the effect patterns A to E are effect modes for accepting the player's operation).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. In addition, the player's intervention element is included in the end effect executed during the end effect period longer than the reference period. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-2-2) Controllable to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, high A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to the base state),
Controllable to at least one of a normal state (for example, normal state), the special state, a first advantageous state as the advantageous state, and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100),
The case of being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the normal state (for example, the case of a so-called first big hit) is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the special state. (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive win jackpot), the end effect selection means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the game control microcomputer 100, Step S366 in FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8-11);
End effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 8-22, FIG. 8-23 to FIG. 8-26) capable of executing end effect during the end effect period,
The end effect execution means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end effect (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect period of the first advantageous state,
Each of the plurality of types of end effects that can be executed during the end effect period of the first advantageous state includes a player's intervention element (for example, operation of stick controller 31A or push button 31B) (for example, effect pattern All of the effect patterns A to E are effect modes for accepting the player's operation).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. In addition, the player's intervention element is included in the end effect executed during the end effect period longer than the reference period. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-2-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information (for example, first special symbol) more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, the variable display of the second special symbol) can be executed, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and after the end of the advantageous state, a special state ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability variable state, a time saving state, a high base state),
First reservation storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to variable display of the first special identification information as first reservation storage information (for example, first reservation storage);
Second reservation storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information on variable display of the second special identification information as second reservation storage information (for example, second reservation storage);
variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information when both the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are stored; Variable display control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B) that executes with priority over display,
A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state as the advantageous state. When,
The advantageous state is controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information rather than the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. End effect selection means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8-11) for selecting a long period as the end effect period at the end of the end at a high rate,
End effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 8-22, FIG. 8-23 to FIG. 8-26) capable of executing end effect during the end effect period,
The end effect execution means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end effect (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect period of the first advantageous state,
Each of the plurality of types of end effects that can be executed during the end effect period of the first advantageous state includes a player's intervention element (for example, operation of stick controller 31A or push button 31B) (for example, effect pattern All of the effect patterns A to E are effect modes for accepting the player's operation).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. In addition, the player's intervention element is included in the end effect executed during the end effect period longer than the reference period. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-3-1) A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1) controllable to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16-round big win, variable probability big win) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6-round big win, normal big win) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Any controllable game state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100),
End effect selection means (e.g., a game control microcomputer) for selecting a longer period as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous state in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state at a higher rate. 100, step S366 in FIGS. 8-10, FIGS. 8-11);
End effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 8-22, FIG. 8-23 to FIG. 8-26) capable of executing end effect during the end effect period,
Receiving post-end performance reception for accepting selection of the performance content from a plurality of types of the performance content from the player during a selection period in which the performance content after the end of the end performance period can be selected in the end performance period. Means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step 069FS156 to step 069FS159 in FIG. 8-23.)
The selection period of the end performance period of the first advantageous state is longer than the selection period of the end performance period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, 6R The 16R probability variable jackpot has a longer selection period of the performance after the jackpot ends than the probability variable jackpot.).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. In addition, since the selection period of the contents of the performance after the end of the performance period at the end is lengthened, the recognition of the contents of the performance becomes easy, and it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state. can do.

(1-3-2) Controllable to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, high A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to the base state),
Controllable to at least one of a normal state (for example, normal state), the special state, and a first advantageous state as the advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100),
The case of being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the normal state (for example, the case of a so-called first big hit) is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the special state. (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive win jackpot), the end effect selection means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the game control microcomputer 100, Step S366 in FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8-11);
End effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 8-22, FIG. 8-23 to FIG. 8-26) capable of executing end effect during the end effect period,
Receiving post-end performance reception for accepting selection of the performance content from a plurality of types of the performance content from the player during a selection period in which the performance content after the end of the end performance period can be selected in the end performance period. Means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step 069FS156 to step 069FS159 in FIG. 8-23.)
The selection period of the end performance period of the first advantageous state is longer than the selection period of the end performance period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, 6R The 16R probability variable jackpot has a longer selection period of the performance after the jackpot ends than the probability variable jackpot.).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. In addition, since the selection period of the contents of the performance after the end of the performance period at the end is lengthened, the recognition of the contents of the performance becomes easy, and it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state. can do.

(1-3-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information (for example, first special symbol) more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, the variable display of the second special symbol) can be executed, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and after the end of the advantageous state, a special state ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability variable state, a time saving state, a high base state),
First reservation storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to variable display of the first special identification information as first reservation storage information (for example, first reservation storage);
Second reservation storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information on variable display of the second special identification information as second reservation storage information (for example, second reservation storage);
variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved memory information when both the first reserved memory information and the second reserved memory information are stored; Variable display control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B) that executes with priority over display,
A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state as the advantageous state. When,
The advantageous state is controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information rather than the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. End effect selection means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 8-10, FIG. 8-11) for selecting a long period as the end effect period at the end of the end at a high rate,
End effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 8-22, FIG. 8-23 to FIG. 8-26) capable of executing end effect during the end effect period,
Reception of post-end performance for accepting selection of the performance content from a plurality of types of the performance content in a selection period in which the performance content after the end of the end performance period can be selected in the end performance period. Means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step 069FS156 to step 069FS159 in FIG. 8-23.)
The selection period of the end performance period of the first advantageous state is longer than the selection period of the end performance period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, 6R The 16R probability variable jackpot has a longer selection period of the performance after the jackpot ends than the probability variable jackpot.).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. In addition, since the selection period of the contents of the performance after the end of the performance period at the end is lengthened, the recognition of the contents of the performance becomes easy, and it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the end of the advantageous state. can do.

(1-4) In any gaming machine from (1-1-1) to (1-3-3) above,
Action detection means for detecting actions by the player (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 in FIG. 8-23) is further provided,
The end effect execution means executes, as an intervening element, a performance mode that requires detection of a motion by the motion detection means during an execution period ( For example, all of the production pattern A to the production pattern E are the production modes for accepting the player's operation).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel boredom due to the element of intervention by the player.

(1-5) In any gaming machine from (1-1-1) to (1-3-3) above,
Action detection means for detecting actions by the player (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 in FIG. 8-23) is further provided,
The end effect execution means executes the end effect in either a performance mode in which detection of motion by the motion detection means is required during the execution period or a performance mode in which detection is not required as an intervention element (for example, , any one of the production pattern A to the production pattern E may be a production mode in which the player's operation is not accepted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel boredom due to the element of intervention by the player.

(1-6) In any of the gaming machines (1-1-1) to (1-5) above,
(The end effect execution means can execute one of a plurality of types of end effect (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect period of the first advantageous state, )
(An end-time effect executed by the end-time effect execution means from among a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) that can be executed during the end-time effect period of the first advantageous state End time effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation units for setting may be used. Step S752A in FIG. 8-19, FIG. 8-20, further comprising step S784 of FIG. 8-21.);
A plurality of types of ending effects are selected by the ending effect receiving means until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a so-called consecutive chance) when the selection is accepted a predetermined number of times (for example, once or a plurality of times). until the end of the game), including an end-time effect in which selection cannot be accepted (for example, in the effect pattern B, when all songs are released, it is impossible to select during the continuous play). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a variety of presentations and to make it difficult for the player to feel boredom.

(1-7) In any of the gaming machines from (1-1-1) to (1-5) above,
(The end effect execution means can execute one of a plurality of types of end effect (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect period of the first advantageous state, )
(receipt of end effect reception for accepting from the player a selection of end effect to be executed by said end effect executing means from among a plurality of types of end effect that can be executed during said end effect period of said first advantageous state; Means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 8-19, FIG. 8-20, Step S784 in FIG. 8-21 .) further comprising
Multiple types of end effects, when the effect result becomes a specific result (for example, success), until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until the so-called consecutive chan ends), acceptance of selection Including an effect at the time of ending that is disabled (for example, effect pattern C is disabled during consecutive games when the setting suggestion is executed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a variety of presentations and to make it difficult for the player to feel boredom.

(1-8) In the gaming machine of (1-6) or (1-7) above,
(The end effect execution means can execute one of a plurality of types of end effect (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect period of the first advantageous state, )
(receipt of end effect reception for accepting from the player a selection of end effect to be executed by said end effect executing means from among a plurality of types of end effect that can be executed during said end effect period of said first advantageous state; Means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 8-19, FIG. 8-20, Step S784 in FIG. 8-21 .) further comprising
The multiple types of end effects include end effects that allow new selections to be accepted instead of end effects that are disabled to be selected (for example, effect pattern E is different from effect pattern B or It is made selectable when the effect pattern C is made unselectable.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a variety of presentations and to make it difficult for the player to feel boredom.

(1-9) In any of the gaming machines from (1-1-1) to (1-8) above,
(The end effect execution means can execute one of a plurality of types of end effect (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect period of the first advantageous state, )
(receipt of end effect reception for accepting from the player a selection of end effect to be executed by said end effect executing means from among a plurality of types of end effect that can be executed during said end effect period of said first advantageous state; Means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 8-19, FIG. 8-20, Step S784 in FIG. 8-21 .) further comprising
Multiple types of end effects can be selected based on the fulfillment of the release conditions (for example, the condition that other production patterns cannot be selected, the condition that the continuous chan has ended). Includes an end effect that is played. In addition, before the selection period that can accept the selection of the end effect is started, or during the selection period, the player's special operation (for example, back button operation, or command input, specifically, cross The release condition may be established according to the operation of the keys in a predetermined order, repeated pressing of the push button, input of a password, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a variety of presentations and to make it difficult for the player to feel boredom.

(1-10) In any gaming machine from (1-1-1) to (1-9) above,
(The end effect execution means can execute one of a plurality of types of end effect (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E).)
further comprising setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of stages of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The multiple types of end effects include effects suggesting the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (H), effect pattern C suggests the set value It is a performance.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a variety of presentations and to make it difficult for the player to feel boredom.

(1-11) In any gaming machine from (1-1-1) to (1-10) above,
(The end effect execution means can execute one of a plurality of types of end effect (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E).)
The multiple types of end effects include end effects with different lengths (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E have different lengths),
After the execution of the effect at the end is completed, the next variable display is performed so that the period from the start of the performance at the end by the effect execution means at the end to the start of the next variable display is the same. A period adjustment performance is executed until display is started (for example, the ending performance period is set to be longer than performance patterns A to E, and a big win pattern is displayed in the remaining time).

According to such a configuration, it becomes unnecessary to adjust the period from the start of execution of the effect at the end to the start of the next variable display, and the game control can be easily executed.

(1-12) In any gaming machine from (1-1-1) to (1-11) above,
The ending presentation period includes at least a first period and a second period after the first period,
In the first period, related effects (for example, introduction effect, explanation effect, effect mode selection effect) related to the effect executed in the second period are executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27, ending During the performance time, a performance pattern selection period for selecting a performance pattern to be executed thereafter may be provided.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a variety of presentations and to make it difficult for the player to feel boredom.

(2-1-1) A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1) controllable to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16-round big win, variable probability big win) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6-round big win, normal big win) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Any controllable game state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100),
A start effect selection means (for example, a fanfare effect time) for the first advantageous state that selects a longer period as a start effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state at a higher rate than the second advantageous state. For example, game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 8-6, FIG. 8-7),
A plurality of types of advantageous state performances that can be executed during the advantageous state after the end of the start performance period in a notification period (for example, a report performance period) that is a part of the start performance period. Among them, a notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 in FIG. 8-16) capable of executing a notification effect for notifying the type of effect during the executable state,
Advantageous state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, other operation unit for setting) that can receive the selection of the effect during advantageous state from the player from among a plurality of types Steps 069FS123 to 069FS126 in FIGS. 8-16),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. for a long period of time),
The notification effect execution means is
In the notification period of the second advantageous state, the type of the effect during the advantageous state that can be executed after the end of the effect period at the start is notified in a manner that the player cannot select (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (2) In the case of the 6R normal jackpot, and in the case of promotion from the 6R normal jackpot to the 6R variable variable jackpot, the notification effect is executed in a manner that the player cannot select.),
In the notification period of the first advantageous state, it is notified in a manner in which the player can select which of the advantageous state effects to be executed after the end of the start time effect period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 In addition, in the case of the 6R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot, when the selection of which musical piece to output at the time of the jackpot is accepted, the notification performance of notifying the selected musical piece is executed. ).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. Also, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-1-2) Controllable to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, high A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to the base state),
A normal state (for example, a normal state), the special state, a first advantageous state (for example, a 16-round big hit, a probability variable big hit) as the advantageous state, and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. a game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, a 6-round jackpot, a normal jackpot);
The case of being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the normal state (for example, the case of a so-called first big hit) is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the special state. (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive big hit), the start time effect selection means (for example, Game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 8-6, FIG. 8-7),
A plurality of types of advantageous state performances that can be executed during the advantageous state after the end of the start performance period in a notification period (for example, a report performance period) that is a part of the start performance period. Among them, a notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 in FIG. 8-16) capable of executing a notification effect for notifying the type of effect during the executable state,
Advantageous state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, other operation unit for setting) that can receive the selection of the effect during advantageous state from the player from among a plurality of types Steps 069FS123 to 069FS126 in FIGS. 8-16),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. for a long period of time),
The notification effect execution means is
In the notification period of the second advantageous state, the type of the effect during the advantageous state that can be executed after the end of the effect period at the start is notified in a manner that the player cannot select (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (2) In the case of the 6R normal jackpot, and when the 6R normal jackpot is promoted to the 6R variable variable jackpot, the notification effect is executed in a manner that the player cannot select.),
In the notification period of the first advantageous state, it is notified in a manner that the player can select which of the advantageous state effects to be executed after the end of the start time effect period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 In addition, in the case of the 6R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot, when the selection of which musical piece to output at the time of the jackpot is accepted, the notification performance of notifying the selected musical piece is executed. ).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. Also, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-1-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information (for example, first special symbol) more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, the variable display of the second special symbol) can be executed, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and after the end of the advantageous state, a special state ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability variable state, a time saving state, a high base state),
First reservation storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to variable display of the first special identification information as first reservation storage information (for example, first reservation storage);
Second reservation storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information on variable display of the second special identification information as second reservation storage information (for example, second reservation storage);
variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information when both the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are stored; Variable display control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 8-4) that executes with priority over display,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16-round big win, variable probability big win) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6-round big win, normal big win) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Any controllable game state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100),
The advantageous state is controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information rather than the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. Start time effect selection means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 8-6, FIG. 8- 7) and
A plurality of types of advantageous state performances that can be executed during the advantageous state after the end of the start performance period in a notification period (for example, a report performance period) that is a part of the start performance period. Among them, a notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 in FIG. 8-16) capable of executing a notification effect for notifying the type of effect during the executable state,
Advantageous state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, other operation unit for setting) that can receive the selection of the effect during advantageous state from the player from among a plurality of types Steps 069FS123 to 069FS126 in FIGS. 8-16),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. for a long period of time),
The notification effect execution means is
In the notification period of the second advantageous state, the type of the effect during the advantageous state that can be executed after the end of the effect period at the start is notified in a manner that the player cannot select (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (2) In the case of the 6R normal jackpot, and in the case of promotion from the 6R normal jackpot to the 6R variable variable jackpot, the notification effect is executed in a manner that the player cannot select.),
In the notification period of the first advantageous state, it is notified in a manner in which the player can select which of the advantageous state effects to be executed after the end of the start time effect period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 In addition, in the case of the 6R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot, when the selection of which musical piece to output at the time of the jackpot is accepted, the notification performance of notifying the selected musical piece is executed. ).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. Also, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-2-1) A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1) controllable to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16-round big win, variable probability big win) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6-round big win, normal big win) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Any controllable game state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100),
A start effect selection means (for example, a fanfare effect time) for the first advantageous state that selects a longer period as a start effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state at a higher rate than the second advantageous state. For example, game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 8-6, FIG. 8-7),
A plurality of types of advantageous state performances that can be executed during the advantageous state after the end of the start performance period in a notification period (for example, a report performance period) that is a part of the start performance period. Among them, a notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 in FIG. 8-16) capable of executing a notification effect for notifying the type of effect during the executable state,
Advantageous state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, other operation unit for setting) that can receive the selection of the effect during advantageous state from the player from among a plurality of types Steps 069FS123 to 069FS126 in FIGS. 8-16),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. for a long period of time).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. Also, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-2-2) Controllable to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, high A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to the base state),
A normal state (for example, a normal state), the special state, a first advantageous state (for example, a 16-round big hit, a probability variable big hit) as the advantageous state, and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. a game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, a 6-round jackpot, a normal jackpot);
The case of being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the normal state (for example, the case of a so-called first big hit) is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the special state. (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive big hit), the start time effect selection means (for example, Game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 8-6, FIG. 8-7),
A plurality of types of advantageous state performances that can be executed during the advantageous state after the end of the start performance period in a notification period (for example, a report performance period) that is a part of the start performance period. Among them, a notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 in FIG. 8-16) capable of executing a notification effect for notifying the type of effect during the executable state,
Advantageous state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, other operation unit for setting) that can receive the selection of the effect during advantageous state from the player from among a plurality of types Steps 069FS123 to 069FS126 in FIGS. 8-16),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. for a long period of time).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. Also, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-2-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information (for example, first special symbol) more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, the variable display of the second special symbol) can be executed, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and after the end of the advantageous state, a special state ( For example, a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability variable state, a time saving state, a high base state),
First reservation storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information related to variable display of the first special identification information as first reservation storage information (for example, first reservation storage);
Second reservation storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information on variable display of the second special identification information as second reservation storage information (for example, second reservation storage);
variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information when both the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are stored; Variable display control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 8-4) that executes with priority over display,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16-round big win, variable probability big win) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6-round big win, normal big win) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Any controllable game state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100),
The advantageous state is controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information rather than the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. Start time effect selection means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 8-6, FIG. 8- 7) and
A plurality of types of advantageous state performances that can be executed during the advantageous state after the end of the start performance period in a notification period (for example, a report performance period) that is a part of the start performance period. Among them, a notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 in FIG. 8-16) capable of executing a notification effect for notifying the type of effect during the executable state,
Advantageous state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, other operation unit for setting) that can receive the selection of the effect during advantageous state from the player from among a plurality of types Steps 069FS123 to 069FS126 in FIGS. 8-16),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. for a long period of time).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. Also, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-4) In any gaming machine from (2-1-1) to (2-2-3) above,
In the first advantageous state, there are more types of effects that can be executed during the advantageous state than in the second advantageous state (for example, in the 6R normal jackpot, it is possible to output three songs at the time of the jackpot. , and in the 16R probability variable jackpot, the song at the time of the jackpot can be selected from 10 songs).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. Also, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-5) In any gaming machine from (2-1-1) to (2-4) above,
Based on the increase in the number of times the advantageous state is continuously controlled while being controlled to the special state (for example, the number of consecutive wins), in the first advantageous state, by the advantageous state effect reception means The types of effects that can be selected during the advantageous state are increased (for example, a selectable song for the big hit is added for each consecutive win).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. Also, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-6) In any gaming machine from (2-1-1) to (2-5) above,
As the first advantageous state, there are a 1A advantageous state (for example, a 16-round high probability big hit) and a 1B advantageous state (for example, a 6-round high probability big hit) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the 1A advantageous state,
The notification period of the 1A advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the 1B advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. long period).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. Also, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-7) In any gaming machine from (2-1-1) to (2-6) above,
The notification effect executing means, as the notification effect,
When it is in the second advantageous state, as the effect in the advantageous state, the type of effect for notifying whether it is in an advantageous advantageous state is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the jackpot type The notification effect and the round promotion effect are executed as the notification effect.) On the other hand,
In the first advantageous state, the notification of the type of music that can be output is executed as the effect during the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the music selection effect is executed as the notification effect).

According to such a configuration, the period during which the game is controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, so that the game value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high. Also, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of delay due to the lengthening of the period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-8) In any gaming machine from (2-1-1) to (2-7) above,
The effect period at the start includes an advantageous state type suggesting period (for example, a jackpot type suggesting display period shown in FIG. 8-17) for executing an effect suggesting the type of the advantageous state,
The advantageous state type suggestion period of the first advantageous state is longer than the advantageous state type suggestion period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the 16R probability variable jackpot is more The period of the jackpot type suggestion display is longer than other jackpots.)

According to such a configuration, the player is informed that the player is in an advantageous state for a longer period of time. As a result, it is possible to please the player and improve the amusement of the game.

(Description of characteristic part 104F of the present embodiment)
Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine in which the fanfare period during which the fanfare effect of the jackpot is executed is set longer for a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than for a jackpot that is disadvantageous (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-148). Gazette). Thus, if the fanfare period is lengthened, the interval between the big wins and the next big wins becomes longer, the number of prize balls given to the player per unit period can be reduced, and the gambling nature becomes too high. can be suppressed.

However, if the fanfare period for an advantageous big win is simply set to be long, the player will see a long fanfare effect every time an advantageous big win is won. For this reason, although it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming too high, there is a possibility that the amusement of the game may decrease. Gaming machines according to inventions 104F and 105F for solving such problems will be described below. In addition, below, the characteristic of the gaming machine according to the inventions 104F and 105F is expressed as a characteristic portion 104F. The characteristic portion 104F is applicable to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. Differences from the characteristic portion 069F described above will be described below.

FIG. 9-1 is a diagram showing an example of determination of special figure display results and the like. As shown in FIG. 8-5 above, in the characterizing portion 069F, there are two types of big hits for the first special symbol and one type of big hit for the second special symbol. Referring to FIG. 9-1, in characteristic portion 104F, there are two types of big wins for the first special symbol, namely, the first big win and the second big win, and there are four kinds of big wins for the second special symbol, namely the third to sixth big wins. Kind.

As explained with reference to FIG. 8-5, the number of rounds of the big win and whether to be controlled to the variable probability state after the big win or to the normal state which is not the variable probability state differ depending on the type of the big win. The number of prize balls for one game ball that enters the big prize hole is constant, and the maximum number of game balls that can enter the big prize hole per round is almost constant. The number of prize balls obtained by the final round increases as the number of rounds of the big hit increases.

The first and third jackpots of this embodiment are jackpots (4-round normal jackpots) that have a small number of rounds and are easily controlled to a normal state after the jackpot ends. The second and fifth jackpots are jackpots (4-round variable probability jackpots) that have a small number of rounds and are easily controlled to a variable probability state after the completion of the jackpot. The fourth jackpot is a jackpot (16-round normal jackpot) that has a large number of rounds and is easily controlled to a normal state after the jackpot ends. The sixth big win is a big win (16-round variable probability big win) that has a large number of rounds of big wins and is easily controlled to a variable probability state after the big win. As shown in FIG. 9-1, for each jackpot type, jackpot symbols and determination ratios are predetermined.

In the characteristic part 069F, as shown in FIG. 8-5, the jackpot probability in the non-variable state (normal state) is 1/300, and the jackpot probability in the variable state is 4/300 (= 1/75). . In the characteristic part 104F, the jackpot probability in the non-variable probability state (normal state) is 1/300, and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is 1/50. Also, in the characteristic part 069F, the upper limit number of times is provided for the probability variable number of times. In the variable probability state, it is also controlled in the time saving state. Even when the variable probability state is not reached after the big hit state, the state is controlled to the time saving state. Any time-saving state is continued up to 100 times of variable display after the big hit.

In the time-saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened at a high rate, so the player hits the game ball in the area on the right side of the game board 2 shown in FIG. 8-1. Therefore, the variable display of the second special figure is executed by the starting winning to the second starting winning opening of the variable winning ball device 6B. In the variation display of the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the 16-round probability variable jackpot (sixth jackpot) is determined at a higher rate than the other jackpots. Thereby, when it is controlled to the time-saving state, it is controlled to the 16-round probability variable jackpot at a rate higher than other jackpots.

FIG. 9-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. This variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 in FIG. 8-3. Referring to FIG. 9-2, in the variation pattern setting process, CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S250). When the jackpot flag is set (step S250; YES), transmission setting of an effect control command (display result designation command) corresponding to the jackpot type (first jackpot to sixth jackpot) is performed (step S251). When the jackpot flag is not set (step S250; NO), transmission setting of an effect control command (display result designation command) indicating a loss is performed (step S252).

After performing the process of step S251 or the process of step S251, a variation pattern is determined according to a special figure display result (step S253). In the process of step S253, a variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is selected and set as a use table for determining a variation pattern. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to one of a plurality of variations depending on whether the special figure display result is a big hit or not. It is good if there is The CPU 103 may determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the variation random number buffer. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table, depending on whether the special figure display result is a big hit and the number of pending memories, the numerical value to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is one of a plurality of types. may be assigned to a variation pattern of

Following the processing of step S253, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the effect control command (variation pattern designation command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern (step S254). In addition to the variation pattern specification command, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the first variation start command that specifies the start of the first special figure game (or the second variation start command that specifies the start of the second special figure game) may be performed. Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the special figure variation time timer value corresponding to the variation pattern to the special figure variation time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 (step S256), and the value of the special figure process flag. is updated to "2" corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S256), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S256, special symbol variation processing is executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

FIG. 9-3 is a diagram exemplifying the variation pattern at the time of the low-probability-low base. FIG. 9-4 is a diagram exemplifying a variation pattern at the time of the high-probability-high base. FIG. 9-5 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern at the time of low probability height base. 9-3 to 9-5, in this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and the case where " A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in correspondence with each of the cases of "reach" and corresponding to cases such as when the variable display result is "jackpot".

In addition, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is such that when the decorative symbols statically displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the decorative symbols not yet statically displayed are variable. or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols constitute all or part of the jackpot combination and fluctuate in synchronism with each other. As a specific example, in a part of the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration symbol display areas, when the decoration symbols constituting a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, they are still stopped. In the remaining decorative pattern display areas not displayed, the decorative patterns are fluctuating, or in all or part of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas, the decorative patterns are in a winning combination. It is a display state that fluctuates synchronously while constituting all or part of it. In addition, in response to the ready-to-win state, a character image different from the decoration pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, the display mode of the background image is changed, or the fluctuation mode of the decoration pattern is changed. Sometimes I let you. The display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, and the change of the variation mode of the decoration pattern are called ready-to-win effect display. In addition, the variable display mode of the decoration pattern which does not become "reach" is called "non-reach".

As for the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, a variation pattern with a longer variable display time is selected at a higher rate for a jackpot with a higher expected value of prize balls to be obtained than a jackpot with a lower expected value. The selection ratio is set in advance as follows. As a result, the period from the display of the combination of the undetermined big winning patterns to the start of the first round of the big winning becomes longer for the big winning with a higher expected value of prize balls to be obtained than for the low winning. For example, the 16-round variable probability jackpot and the 16-round normal jackpot have longer variable display times than the 4-round probability variable jackpot and the 4-round normal jackpot. PB5-14 and PB5-17 are preset to be selected at a high rate. The ``long variable display time'' may be, for example, a time equal to or longer than the minimum time required to digest the jackpot that gives the most prize balls, or the numerator of the jackpot probability in the shortened variation during the time saving state. The time may be equal to or longer than the time required for the variable display when the variable display is performed the same number of times as the number of the denominator, or the time may be approximately 100 seconds or longer.

FIG. 9-6A is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. This variable display start setting process is executed in step S171 in FIG. 8-13. Referring to FIG. 9-6(A), in the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the final stop pattern (fixed decoration pattern) based on the special figure display result (step S701). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether the special figure display result is a big hit or a loss by reading the EXT data in the display result specifying command. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern (step S702). That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 as the usage pattern. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 executes a pending digestion process (step S703). Subsequently, the production control CPU 120 sets a decoration design fluctuation time timer value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern to a decoration design fluctuation time timer provided in a predetermined area (for example, production control timer setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 (step S704), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step S705), and the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 9-6(B) is a flow chart showing an example of effect processing during variable display. This effect processing during variable display is executed in step S172 in FIG. 8-13. Referring to FIG. 9-6(B), in the effect processing during variable display, effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the decorative symbol variation time timer value (step S710), and the decorative symbol variation time timer value becomes 0. (step S711). When the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer value is not 0 (step S711; NO), the effect processing during variable display is terminated. When the decoration design variation time timer value becomes 0 (step S711; YES), the value of the production process flag is updated to "3" corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step S712), variable Terminate the effect processing during display. In the period until the decorative design variation time timer value becomes 0, various effects such as variable display of the decorative design are executed.

FIG. 9-7 is a first timing chart showing an example of an effect from the variable display to the start of the first round of big wins. In the high-probability high base state or low-probability low base state, if it is determined to be a 16-round probability variable jackpot, respectively, the variation patterns shown in Figure 9-4 (B) or Figure 9-5 (B) A variation pattern is determined from among them.

With reference to FIG. 9-7 (A), when the variation pattern PB5-4 is determined, the variation display of the decoration pattern is started at time Ta1, and when it becomes time Ta2 after the pre-reach period of 20 seconds. , reach (for example, the reach of the jackpot symbol “6” corresponding to the normal jackpot of 16 rounds), and the super reach γ effect is started. After that, when time Ta3 comes after a reach period of 30 seconds, a combination of big hit symbols "6" is derived and displayed. After that, the promotion performance is executed in the undetermined period of the big win patterns for 40 seconds, and the combination of the confirmed big win patterns "7" is derived and displayed at the time Ta4 after a successful result. After that, when the time Ta5 is reached after a 0.5 second period for determining the jackpot pattern, the jackpot game state of the 16-round probability variable jackpot is started. After that, after the fanfare performance is executed in the fanfare period of 30 seconds, when the time Ta6 comes, the first round of the big win is started and the big prize opening is opened.

FIG. 9-8 is a first screen transition diagram showing the flow of effects from the variable display to the start of the first round of big wins. Referring to FIG. 9-8, as shown in FIG. 9-8(A), when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed based on the variable pattern PB5-4, the decorative patterns fluctuate at times Ta1 to Ta2. The display is executed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. FIG. As shown in FIG. 9-8(B), at time Ta2, the variable display of decorative symbols becomes a ready-to-win with the symbol “6” and is moved to the upper right portion of the image display device 5 . At times Ta2 to Ta3, the variable display of the reduced decorative patterns is continued in the pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and the central portion of the image display device 5 produces super reach γ (for example, a girl and a monster). battle) is executed.

In the effect of super reach γ, a result of a mode advantageous to the player (for example, the result of the girl winning the monster) is obtained, and as shown in FIG. A combination of jackpot symbols is displayed in an undetermined state (for example, in a swing display state). After that, as shown in FIG. 9-8(D), at times Ta3 to Ta4, the undetermined "6" jackpot symbol combination is moved to the upper right portion of the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 In the central part of , a promotion effect (for example, operation of an operation unit such as a push button 31B (continuous hit operation) indicating whether or not to be promoted to a pattern corresponding to a jackpot advantageous to the player (here, a 16-round probability variable jackpot) By displaying a button display to the effect that prompting the player to do so, by operating it, it becomes a big hit pattern of "7", and by displaying characters or characters suggesting that it may be promoted to a probability variable big hit An effect that suggests to the player that it is in a promising state) is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-8(E), 16 rounds are performed by the player between times Ta3 and Ta4, or after time Ta4 when the undetermined period has passed, until time Ta5. A combination of "7" jackpot symbols is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R as a confirmation display corresponding to the probability variable jackpot. When operated by the player, the movable body 32 is operated once before the combination of the jackpot symbols is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (F), from time Ta5, a 16-round probability variable jackpot game state is started. As shown in FIG. 9-8(G), during the jackpot fanfare period from time Ta5 to Ta6, the selection of a song to be output during the jackpot is accepted from the player. The player operates the operation unit such as the stick controller 31A to move the display indicating the selection candidate (in this case, the display of the frame surrounding the characters), and operates the operation unit such as the push button 31B. , to determine the selection candidate music as the music to be output. As shown in FIG. 9-8(H), the first round of big wins starts at time Ta6.

Returning to FIG. 9-7, with reference to FIG. 9-7 (B), when the variation pattern PB5-5 is determined, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started at time Tb1, and the pre-reach period of 20 seconds is reached. When the time Tb2 comes later, the reach of the jackpot pattern "7" corresponding to the 16-round probability variable jackpot is reached, and the super reach γ effect is started. After that, when the time Tb3 comes after the ready-to-win period of 10 seconds, the combination of the jackpot symbol "7" is derived and displayed. After that, after the pre-fanfare performance is executed in the undetermined period of the big win patterns for 60 seconds, when the time Tb4 comes, the combination of the decided big win patterns "7" is derived and displayed. After that, when the time Tb5 comes after a 0.5-second big-hit symbol determination period, a 16-round probability variable big-hit big-hit game state is started. After that, after the fanfare effect is executed in the fanfare period of 30 seconds, when the time Tb6 comes, the first round of the big win is started and the big prize opening is opened.

FIG. 9-9 is a second screen transition diagram showing the flow of effects from the variable display to the start of the first round of big wins. Referring to FIG. 9-9, as shown in FIG. 9-9(A), when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed based on the variation pattern PB5-5, at times Tb1 to Tb2, the A display similar to that of (A) is executed by the image display device 5 . As shown in FIG. 9-9(B), at time Tb2, the variable display of decorative symbols becomes ready-to-win with the symbol “7” and is moved to the upper right portion of the image display device 5 . From time Tb2 to Tb3, the variable display of the reduced decorative symbols is continued in the symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and the central portion of the image display device 5 produces super reach γ (for example, a girl and a monster). battle) is executed.

In the effect of super reach γ, the result is advantageous for the player (for example, the girl wins the monster), and as shown in FIG. A combination of jackpot symbols is displayed in an undetermined state (for example, in a swing display state). After that, after the first action of the movable body 32 is executed, as shown in FIG. 5, and at the center of the image display device 5, a pre-fanfare effect (for example, FIG. 9-9 ( The effect similar to the fanfare effect shown in F)) is executed.

Then, the player is prompted to operate the operation unit such as the push button 31B once, and as shown in FIG. 7" jackpot symbol combinations are displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. When the player performs the operation, the movable body 32 performs the second action before the combination of "7" jackpot symbols is displayed. 9-9(F)-(H) are the same as FIGS. 9-8(F)-(H).

As shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A), (B), and FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9, the promotion performance execution period (in this embodiment, , 70.5 seconds), the execution period of the pre-fanfare effect explained in FIG. 9D (90.5 seconds in this embodiment) is longer. Note that the fanfare period may also be lengthened. Also, the reach period may be included to make it longer.

Further, when executing the pre-fanfare effect described in FIG. 9-9, the movable body 32 is operated twice, while when executing the promotion effect described in FIG. 9-8, the movable body 32 is operated once. Let In this way, when executing the pre-fanfare effect, it is easier to operate the movable body 32 than when executing the promotion effect.

Further, when executing the pre-fanfare effect described in FIG. 9-9, the player is prompted to perform a single operation, while when executing the promotion effect described in FIG. make it As described above, when the pre-fanfare effect is executed, the number of times of executing the effect for prompting the player's action is smaller than when the promotion effect is executed. Since the promotion performance is a place where the player is enthusiastic to want to be promoted to the probability variable jackpot, the continuous hitting operation is made, but in the pre-fanfare performance, the player is informed that it is an advantageous jackpot, and the performance progresses. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player will not actively operate even if the operation is urged. make a request.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, only when it is determined to be a 16-round probability variable jackpot, so that the reach is achieved with the "7" pattern. do. As a result, when the "7" symbol ready-to-win state is achieved, compared to the case of the ready-to-win state by other symbols, it is possible to execute an effect so that the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player is high ( Here, the jackpot is confirmed).

Returning to Figure 9-7, if it is determined to be a 16-round normal jackpot in a high-probability-high base state or a low-probability-low base state, respectively, Fig. 9-4 (C) or Fig. 9-5 ( A variation pattern is determined from among the variation patterns shown in C).

With reference to FIG. 9-7 (C), when the variation pattern PB5-7 is determined, the variation display of the decoration pattern is started at time Tc1, and when it reaches time Tc2 after the pre-reach period of 20 seconds. , reach (for example, the reach of the jackpot symbol “6” corresponding to the normal jackpot of 16 rounds), and the super reach γ effect is started. After that, when the time Tc3 comes after a reach period of 30 seconds, the combination of the jackpot symbols "6" is derived and displayed. After that, the promotion performance is executed in the undetermined period of the big win patterns for 40 seconds, and after a failure result, at time Tc4, the combination of the decided big win patterns "6" is derived and displayed. After that, when the time Tc5 comes after a 0.5-second big-hit symbol determination period, a 16-round normal big-hit big-hit game state is started. Thereafter, after the fanfare effect is executed in the fanfare period of 30 seconds, when the time Tc6 comes, the first round of the big win is started and the big prize opening is opened.

FIGS. 9-10 are third screen transition diagrams showing the flow of effects from the variable display to the start of the first round of big wins. 9-10, as shown in FIG. 9-10(A), when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed based on the variation pattern PB5-7, at times Tc1 to Tc2, the A display similar to that of (A) is executed by the image display device 5 . After that, in FIGS. 9-10(B) to (D), the same display as in FIGS. 9-8(B) to (D) is performed on the image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-10(E), 16 rounds are performed after the player performs an operation between times Tc3 and Tc4, or after time Tc4 when the undetermined period has elapsed, until time Tc5. A combination of "6" jackpot patterns as a confirmation display corresponding to the normal jackpot is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. After that, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (F), from time Tc5, a 16-round normal jackpot game state is started. As shown in FIG. 9-10 (G), during the jackpot fanfare period from time Tc5 to Tc6, selection of a song to be output during the jackpot is accepted from the player. The player operates the operation unit such as the stick controller 31A to move the display indicating the selection candidate (in this case, the display of the frame surrounding the characters), and operates the operation unit such as the push button 31B. , to determine the selection candidate music as the music to be output. As shown in FIG. 9-10 (H), the first round of big wins starts at time Tc6.

As shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A), (C), and FIGS. 9-8 and 9-10, the 16-round normal jackpot described in FIGS. 9-10 (D), (E) Rather than the execution period (60.5 seconds in this embodiment) of the production (promotion failure production), the production (promotion success production ) is executed so that its execution period (70.5 seconds in this embodiment) is longer. In addition, it is executed so as to be long even if the reach period is included. Note that the fanfare period may also be lengthened.

9-10 (D) and (E), the execution period (60.5 seconds in this embodiment) of promotion failure production that suggests a transition to a low probability high base state 9-8 (D), (E) explained, the execution period of the promotion success production suggesting the transition to the high probability high base state (in this embodiment, 70.5 seconds) so that it is longer executed. In addition, it is executed so as to be long even if the reach period is included. Note that the fanfare period may also be lengthened.

When the variable display of decorative symbols is executed based on the variable pattern PB-8, unlike the case described with reference to FIGS. A combination of jackpot symbols is displayed.

FIG. 9-11 is a second timing chart showing an example of an effect from the variable display to the start of the first round of big wins. Referring to FIGS. 9-11, FIG. 9-11(A) is similar to FIG. 9-7(A). With reference to FIG. 9-11 (B), when the variation pattern PB5-5 is determined, the variation display of the decoration pattern is started at time Td1, and when it reaches time Td2 after the pre-reach period of 20 seconds. , reach (for example, the reach of the jackpot pattern "7" corresponding to the 16-round probability variable jackpot), and when it reaches time Td3 after a reach period of 30 seconds, all rotation reach (with the combination of jackpot patterns complete) ) is started. After that, during the 120-second jackpot pattern undetermined period, full rotation reach is executed, and when time Td4 comes, the decided jackpot pattern "7" combination is derived and displayed. After that, when the time Td5 comes after a 0.5-second big-hit symbol determination period, a 16-round probability variable big-hit big-hit game state is started. After that, after the fanfare effect is executed in the fanfare period of 30 seconds, when the time Td6 comes, the first round of the big win is started and the big prize opening is opened.

FIG. 9-12 is a fourth screen transition diagram showing the flow of effects from the variable display to the start of the first round of big wins. 9-12, as shown in FIG. 9-12(A), when the variable display of decorative patterns is executed based on the variation pattern PB5-6, at times Td1 to Td2, the A display similar to that of (A) is executed by the image display device 5 . As shown in FIG. 9-12(B), at time Td2, the variable display of decorative symbols becomes ready-to-win with the symbol "7", and from time Td2 to Td3, the ready-to-win symbol "7" is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 9-12(C), at time Td3, full rotation reach is started in the central pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device. After that, as shown in FIG. 9-12(D), at times Td3 to Td4, at the center of the image display device 5 on the front side where the full rotation reach is being performed, a full rotation performance (for example, 16 rounds by a character A production suggesting that a probability variable jackpot will be achieved) is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (E), at times Td4 to Td5, a combination of "7" jackpot symbols as a confirmation display corresponding to the 16-round probability variable jackpot is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Derived display. After that, when the time Td5 comes after a 0.5-second big-hit symbol determination period, a 16-round probability variable big-hit big-hit game state is started. After that, after the fanfare effect is executed in the fanfare period of 30 seconds, when the time Td6 comes, the first round of the big win is started and the big prize opening is opened.

The all-rotation effect, the fanfare effect for the big win, and the effect during the round for the big win are related effects (here, effects including the same character). Further, as the all-rotation effect, a special effect is executed for the player, which is different from the effect executed during the undetermined period shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10.

As shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A), (B), and FIGS. 9-8 and 9-12, the promotion effect execution period (in this embodiment, , 70.5 seconds), the execution period (150.5 seconds in this embodiment) of the full-rotation effect described in FIGS. In addition, it is executed so as to be long even if the reach period is included. Note that the fanfare period may also be lengthened.

FIG. 9-13 is a third timing chart showing an example of an effect from the variable display to the start of the first round of big wins. 9-13, FIG. 9-13(A) is similar to FIG. 9-7(A). FIG. 9-13(A) shows the case where the variation pattern PB5-14 is determined in the low probability base. With reference to FIG. 9-13(B), FIG. 9-13(B) shows the case where the variation pattern PB5-4 is determined in the high probability base.

In the case of a big hit in the high-probability base state of Figure 9-13 (B), the undetermined period is longer than the jackpot in the low-probability base state of Figure 9-13 (A). there is As a result, the execution period of the promotion effect in the low definite height base state of FIG. 9-13 (A) (70.5 seconds in this embodiment) than the high definite height base of FIG. It is executed so that the execution period of the promotion effect in the state (90.5 seconds in this embodiment) is longer. Note that the fanfare period may also be lengthened. Also, the reach period may be included to make it longer.

(Regarding Modified Example of Characteristic Portion 104F)
(1) In the above-described embodiment, when it is determined to be a big win A, after displaying the jackpot symbols of the big win B which is more disadvantageous to the player than the big win A and controlling to the big win game state, It is also possible to execute an effect that promotes the game to the jackpot A. - 特許庁

Specifically, when it is determined to be a 16-round definite variable jackpot, a 16-round normal jackpot, a 4-round definite variable jackpot, or a 4-round normal jackpot, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the 16-round definite variable jackpot. After displaying the symbols and controlling to the big win game state, an effect of promoting to the 16 round probability variable big win may be executed.

In addition, when it is decided to make a 16-round normal jackpot, after displaying a jackpot pattern such as a 4-round normal jackpot that is more disadvantageous to the player than the 16-round normal jackpot and controlling to a jackpot game state, 16 rounds are performed. You may make it perform the production|presentation which is promoted to a normal jackpot.

In addition, when it is decided to make a 4-round variable probability big win, after displaying a jackpot pattern such as a 4-round normal jackpot that is more disadvantageous to the player than the 4-round probability variable big win and controlling to a big win game state, 4 rounds are performed. You may make it perform the production|presentation which promotes to a probability variable big hit.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, in the high probability height base state and the low probability height base state, the variable display time of the corresponding variation pattern is the same I decided to However, it is not limited to this, and when it is not in the high probability high base state, the variable display time of the corresponding variation pattern may be shortened compared to when it is in the high probability high base state.

For example, the variable display time of all corresponding variation patterns may be shortened. Further, the variable display time of the variation pattern with the longest variable display time among the corresponding variation patterns may be shortened. Further, the variable display time of a specific variation pattern among the corresponding variation patterns may be shortened.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, the effects of super reach shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10 are the same. However, it is not limited to this, and these effects may be different. Although the effects shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10 are battle effects, the enemy characters may be different, or the ally characters may be different.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12, after reaching the ready-to-win state, no particular effect is executed, and the full-rotation effect is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after a super ready-to-win effect (for example, a battle effect shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10) is executed after becoming ready-to-win, the full-rotation effect may be performed. Further, after executing the pseudo-continuous effect, the full-rotation effect may be performed.

(5) As a variation pattern at the time of losing the high-probability-high base state, the variation time (eg, 10 seconds) in which the shortening control is not executed may be set until the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (eg, 20 times) after the end of the big win. .

(6) In the above-described embodiment, in the first specific effect such as the pre-fanfare effect shown in FIG. In the second specific performance such as success performance, the movable body 32 is operated once. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this as long as the movable member is made easier to operate when executing the first specific effect than when executing the second specific effect. For example, a plurality of movable members may be provided, and only the first movable member may be operated when executing the second specific effect, and the first movable member and the second movable member may be operated when executing the first specific effect.

(7) The expected value of gaming value (for example, prize balls) obtained in an advantageous state not only differs depending on whether the number of rounds is large or small, but also the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one round is large or small. or whether the probability of winning a big hit after a big win is high or low, or whether or not the slot machine is in the AT state.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 104F)
(1-1) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
Compared to the first type of advantageous state (for example, 16R big win) and the first type of advantageous state, the expected value of the game value (for example, prize balls) to be obtained is low (for example, the number of rounds is small, the big win Advantageous state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling any of a plurality of types of advantageous states including a second type of advantageous state (for example, 4R jackpot) (low probability of winning a big hit later); ,
Variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7) that can be changed to a state (for example, open state) in which game media can be won in an advantageous state;
A notification effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, effect from reach period to undetermined symbol display) to notify that it is controlled to an advantageous state;
After the end of the notification effect, a specific effect ( For example, a specific effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect of the pattern undetermined period, the effect of the pattern fixed period, the effect of the fanfare period),
The specific period is longer when controlled to the first type of advantageous state than when controlled to the second type of advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-3 to 9-5, FIG. 9 As indicated by -7, in the case of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the pattern undetermined period is longer than in the case of other jackpots.The reach period, the pattern fixed period, and the fanfare period may be lengthened.),
The notification effect means is
After suggesting the possibility of being in an advantageous state (for example, 7-pattern reach) in a manner that can specify that it is controlled to the first type of advantageous state, it is notified that it is controlled to the first type of advantageous state. (For example, unconfirmed display of 7 patterns) 1st notification effect (for example, production from reach period of FIG. 9-7 (B) to unconfirmed pattern display, see FIGS. 9-9 (B) and (C) )When,
After suggesting the possibility of being in an advantageous state (for example, even number symbol reach) in a manner that can specify that it is controlled to the second type of advantageous state, it is notified that it is controlled to the second type of advantageous state. (For example, undetermined display of even numbered patterns) Second notification effect (for example, production from reach period to undetermined pattern display in Figures 9-7 (A) and 9-7 (C), Figure 9-8 (B), (C), see FIGS. 9-10 (B), (C)),
The specific effect means is
A first specific effect that is executed after the end of the first notification effect and is not executed after the end of the second notification effect (for example, a pre-fanfare effect similar to the fanfare effect during the symbol undetermined period in FIG. 9-7 (B) )When,
It is possible to execute a second specific effect (for example, promotion success effect in FIG. 9-7 (A)) that is executed after the end of the second notification effect and notifies that the first type of advantageous state is controlled. can be,
The execution period of the first specific effect is longer than that of the second specific effect (see, for example, FIGS. 9-7(A) to (C)).

According to such a configuration, the state in which the variable winning means can win game media when controlled to the first type of advantageous state compared to when controlled to the second type of advantageous state. By lengthening the period until the control is completed, the game value given to the player per unit period can be reduced. Further, even if the period until the variable winning means is controlled to the state in which the game medium can win a prize is lengthened, the first notification effect, the second notification effect, the first specific effect, or the second specific effect can be obtained. Since the effect can be executed, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered. Further, when the first kind of advantageous state is controlled, the first specific effect having a long execution period is executed, so that the player can be given a sense of superiority.

(1-2) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Compared to the first type of advantageous state (for example, 16R big win) and the first type of advantageous state, the expected value of the game value (for example, prize balls) to be obtained is low (for example, the number of rounds is small, the big win Advantageous state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling any of a plurality of types of advantageous states including a second type of advantageous state (for example, 4R jackpot) (low probability of winning a big hit later); ,
Variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7) that can be changed to a state (for example, open state) in which game media can be won in an advantageous state;
A notification effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, effect from reach period to undetermined symbol display) to notify that it is controlled to an advantageous state;
After the end of the notification effect, a specific effect ( For example, a specific effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect of the pattern undetermined period, the effect of the pattern fixed period, the effect of the fanfare period),
The specific period is longer when controlled to the first type of advantageous state than when controlled to the second type of advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-3 to 9-5, FIG. 9 As indicated by -7, in the case of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the pattern undetermined period is longer than in the case of other jackpots.The reach period, the pattern fixed period, and the fanfare period may be lengthened.),
The notification effect means is
After suggesting the possibility of being in an advantageous state (for example, 7-pattern reach) in a manner that can specify that it is controlled to the first type of advantageous state, it is notified that it is controlled to the first type of advantageous state. (For example, undetermined display of 7 patterns) 1st notification effect (for example, effect from the reach period of FIG. 9-7 (B) to undetermined pattern display, see FIGS. 9-9 (B) and (C) )When,
After suggesting the possibility of being in an advantageous state (for example, even number symbol reach) in a manner that can specify that it is controlled to the second type of advantageous state, it is notified that it is controlled to the second type of advantageous state. (For example, undetermined display of even-numbered patterns) Second notification effect (for example, production from reach period to undetermined pattern display in FIGS. 9-7 (A) and 9-7 (C), FIG. 9-8 (B), (C), see FIGS. 9-10 (B), (C)),
The specific effect means is
A first specific effect that is executed after the end of the first notification effect and is not executed after the end of the second notification effect (for example, a pre-fanfare effect similar to the fanfare effect during the symbol undetermined period in FIG. 9-7 (B) )When,
It is possible to execute a second specific effect (for example, the promotion success effect of FIG. 9-7 (A)) that is executed after the end of the second notification effect and notifies that the first type of advantageous state is controlled. can be,
The execution period of the total of the first notification effect and the first specific effect is longer than the total execution period of the second notification effect and the second specific effect (for example, FIG. 9-7 (A) ~ (C) reference).

According to such a configuration, the state in which the variable winning means can win game media when controlled to the first type of advantageous state, compared to when controlled to the second type of advantageous state. By lengthening the period until the control is completed, the game value given to the player per unit period can be reduced. Further, even if the period until the variable winning means is controlled to the state in which the game medium can win a prize is lengthened, the first notification effect, the second notification effect, the first specific effect, or the second specific effect can be obtained. Since the effect can be executed, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered. In addition, when the first type of advantageous state is controlled, the first notification effect and the first specific effect, which have a long total execution period, are executed, so that the player can be given a sense of superiority.

(2) In the gaming machine (1-1) or (1-2) above,
The specific effect means is executed after the end of the second notification effect, and a third specific effect (for example, the promotion failure effect in FIG. ) can also be performed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first type of advantageous state or the second type of advantageous state will be reached after the end of the second notification performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can be done.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The specific effect means does not execute the third specific effect after the end of the second notification effect, and a fourth specific effect (for example, FIG. 9- 4, an effect for informing that the second type of advantageous state has been established without executing the promotion failure effect, shown by the variation patterns PB5-8 and PB5-10 in FIG. 9-5, can be further executed.

According to such a configuration, when the expected value of the game value to be obtained is the second type advantageous state, which is lower than the first type advantageous state, the advantageous state is controlled by executing the third specific effect. Since it is possible to prevent the player from having too much expectation that the type of the game may actually be the first type of game state, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1-1) to (3) above,
Further comprising a special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state) different from the advantageous state,
The advantageous state control means, when being controlled to the special state, controls to the first type of advantageous state at a rate higher than that of the second type (see, for example, FIG. 9-1).

According to such a configuration, in the special state, since the rate of being controlled to the first type of advantageous state increases, the rate of execution of the second specific effect also increases. Players' expectations can be heightened.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1-1) to (4) above,
When the notification effect means suggests the possibility of becoming an advantageous state in a manner that can be specified to be controlled to the first type of advantageous state (for example, "7" symbol reach), the second type of Compared to the case of suggesting the possibility of being in an advantageous state (for example, "6" symbol reach) in a manner in which the control to be in an advantageous state can be specified, the degree of expectation of being advantageous to the player is increased. Execute the notification effect (for example, as shown in the variation pattern PB5-5 in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, in the case of 7 symbol reach, the big hit is confirmed, but in the case of other symbol reach, It is not a big hit confirmation.In the case of "7" pattern reach, it is a probability variation confirmation, but in the case of other pattern reach, it may not be a probability variation confirmation.If it is not a probability variation confirmation, you can promote it to a probability variation. You may make it report|report after that whether it is not.).

According to such a configuration, when the possibility of the first type advantageous state in which the expected value of the game value to be obtained is high is suggested, it is often advantageous for the player. By suggesting the possibility of a state, the player's sense of expectation can be heightened.

(6) In any gaming machine from (1-1) to (5) above,
further comprising a movable member (eg, movable body 32),
When executing the first specific effect, the specific effect means makes it easier to operate the movable member than when executing the second specific effect (for example, in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5). In the variation patterns PB5-4 and PB5-14, the movable body 32 is operated once, and in the variation patterns PB5-5 of FIGS.9-4 and 9-5, the movable body 32 is operated twice. In addition, only the first movable member may be operated when executing the second specific effect, and the first movable member and the second movable member may be operated when executing the first specific effect.).

According to such a configuration, the action of the movable member can enhance the amusement of the game.

(7) In any gaming machine from (1-1) to (6) above,
Action detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, operation detection unit 31) for detecting actions by the player is further provided,
When the specific effect means executes the first specific effect, the number of times of executing the effect that prompts the player to act is smaller than when the second specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 9- 4, the variation patterns PB5-4 and PB5-14 in FIGS. 9-5 prompt repeated hits, and the variation patterns PB5-5 in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5 prompt one operation).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by the effect of prompting the action of the player.

(8) In any gaming machine from (1-1) to (7) above,
The first specific effect in the first game state (for example, high-probability-high base state) is a second game state (for example, low-probability-high base state, The execution period is longer than the first specific effect in the low probability low base state) (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4, 9-5, and 9-13, the 16R probability variable jackpot in the low probability high base state Compared to the case of becoming, if it becomes a 16R probability variable big hit in a high probability high base state, the execution period of the promotion effect is lengthened).

According to such a configuration, the first specific effect whose execution time is longer than that of the first specific effect in the second game state is executed in the first game state which is more advantageous for the player than in the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

(9) In any gaming machine from (1-1) to (8) above,
After suggesting the type of advantageous state, during the period until the variable prize winning means changes to a state in which the game medium can be won, a special suggestive effect that suggests a game state after the advantageous state can be executed. Further equipped with suggestive production means,
The special suggestion directing means includes:
A first special suggestion effect that suggests a transition to a first game state (for example, a high probability and high base state);
and a second special suggestion performance suggesting a transition to a second game state (for example, a low-probability-high base state, a low-probability-low base state) that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the first game state. ,
The first special suggestion effect has a longer execution period than the second special suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4, 9-5, and 9-7, the transition to the low probability high base state The execution period of the promotion success effect suggesting a transition to the high-probability-high base state is longer than the execution period of the promotion failure effect suggesting .

According to such a configuration, the transition to the first game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second game state, takes longer to execute than the second special suggestion performance suggesting the transition to the second game state. Since the first special suggestion effect suggesting is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration relating to a characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration relating to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a first type of advantageous state (for example, 16R jackpot) and the first type of advantageous state. , the expected value of the game value (for example, prize balls) obtained is low (for example, the number of rounds is small, the probability of winning a big hit after a big win is low), and the second type of advantageous state (for example, 4R big win) Advantageous state control means (e.g., game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling any of a plurality of types of advantageous states including Variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7) that can be changed to , and notification effect (for example, effect from ready-to-win period to undetermined symbol display) that notifies control to an advantageous state can be executed. Informing effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120), and after the end of the informing effect, a specific period until the variable winning means changes to a state in which the game medium can be won (for example, from the pattern undetermined period A specific effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, effect of pattern undetermined period, effect of pattern fixed period, effect of fanfare period) in the period until the opening of the big prize opening) In addition, the specific period is longer when controlled to the first type of advantageous state than when controlled to the second type of advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-3 to 9-5, As shown in Fig. 9-7, in the case of the 16R probability variable jackpot, the pattern undetermined period is longer than in other jackpots, and the reach period, the pattern fixed period, and the fanfare period may be lengthened. ), the notification effect means, after suggesting the possibility of becoming an advantageous state in a manner that can be specified to be controlled to the first type of advantageous state (for example, 7 symbol reach), the first type of advantageous state The first notification effect (for example, the reach period in FIG. 9-7 (B) to the undetermined symbol display, FIG. 9-9 (B), see (C)) and after suggesting the possibility of being in an advantageous state in a manner that can be specified to be controlled in the second type of advantageous state (for example, even number symbol reach), the second A second notification effect (for example, the reach period of FIG. 9-7 (A) and FIG. Confirmed pattern Effects up to display, see FIGS. 9-8 (B), (C), FIGS. 9-10 (B), (C)) can be executed, and the specific effect means terminates the first notification effect A first specific effect (for example, a fanfare pre-fanfare effect similar to the fanfare effect during the symbol undetermined period of FIG. 9-7 (B)) which is executed later and is not executed after the second notification effect is completed, and the second notification It is possible to execute a second specific effect (for example, the promotion success effect of FIG. 9-7 (A)) that is executed after the effect is completed and that the first type of advantageous state is controlled. The execution period of the first specific effect is longer than that of the second specific effect (see, for example, FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C)). Predetermined production execution means (for example, production control The CPU 120 is provided with a setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7, or a ready-to-reach announcement based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9, as the effect during variable display), and the predetermined effect The production mode is a special mode that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9), and a specific mode that suggests settings ( For example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns), and the predetermined effect execution means, when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times, the predetermined effect of the special mode and When it is possible to execute any of the predetermined effects of the specific mode (for example, during variable display of normal reach and super reach as shown in FIG. 10-21 as the second embodiment), at the first time out of a plurality of times The predetermined performance of the special mode can be executed at a higher rate when executing the predetermined performance at a second number of times after the first number of times among a plurality of times than when executing the predetermined performance. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period in the second period after the first period. Part) gaming machine that executes a ready-to-win notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, at a higher rate when executing the effect during variable display.

According to such a configuration, the state in which the variable winning means can win game media when controlled to the first type of advantageous state compared to when controlled to the second type of advantageous state. By lengthening the period until the control is completed, the game value given to the player per unit period can be reduced. Further, even if the period until the variable winning means is controlled to the state in which the game medium can win a prize is lengthened, the first notification effect, the second notification effect, the first specific effect, or the second specific effect can be obtained. Since the effect can be executed, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered. Further, when the first kind of advantageous state is controlled, the first specific effect having a long execution period is executed, so that the player can be given a sense of superiority. Further, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special mode is more likely to be executed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be heightened at the timing close to the one game result.

Incidentally, as a predetermined effect of the specific mode for suggesting the setting, instead of the effect by the image display device, or in addition to the effect by the image display device, the suggestive effect regarding the setting may be performed by the action mode of the movable body. . For example, by selecting the operation mode of the movable body from a plurality of types by lottery or the like, and by varying the selection ratio of each operation mode according to the set value, the set value is advantageous to the player. , the movable body may be more likely to move in a specific type of motion mode. By doing so, the game interest can be improved.
Further, after the end of the notification effect, when the variable winning means changes to a state in which the game media can be won, the set value suggesting effect may be performed. By doing so, even if the period until the variable winning means is controlled to the state in which the game medium can be won is lengthened, the set value suggesting effect is executed in addition to the notification effect and the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the interest in the game from being lowered.

Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the game value given to the player per unit period, prevent the decline in interest in the game, and give the player a sense of superiority. In addition, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of heightening expectations for an advantageous state at a timing close to one game result, it is possible to control the player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) and A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different advantages for players, and has a plurality of types of performance modes. Predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a predetermined effect in one of the effect modes) suggests setting based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as effect during variable display, or A part that can execute a reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9), and the production mode of the predetermined production is a special mode (for example, a special pattern) that suggests that it is controlled to the advantageous state Reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) and a specific mode for making suggestions about settings (for example, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7), The predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, as a second embodiment, As shown, during variable display of normal reach or super reach, the predetermined effect is executed at the second number of times after the first number of times among the plurality of times than when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of times among the plurality of times. When executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a higher rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 Based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period after the first period is based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 which is a special pattern. The part that executes the reach notice at a high rate) gaming machines can be mentioned. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

Characteristic portions of other embodiments will be described below.
(Description of characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characterizing part 103SG of this embodiment will be described. In addition, in the description of each step of the flow chart in the present embodiment, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "103SGS1", "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach", "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". In addition, the configuration having the same function as that of the pachinko game machine 1 explained in the basic explanation or having a different form, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted from detailed explanation by attaching the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Described as a standard. Incidentally, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

Next, the game machine according to Example 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-19.

First, FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-3, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 103SG003, a glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down. This is the game area where a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 103SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 103SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 10-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 103SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3, the main board 11 in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 103SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 103SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 103SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also.

A setting-switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting-switching switch 103SG052, is housed in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11. The lock switch 103SG051 and the setting-switching switch 103SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 103SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 103SG201.

Since the substrate case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 103SG003 is closed. Operation becomes possible by opening the gaming machine frame 103SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 103SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch that can execute switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, with a setting key. In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be shared by one key.

A display monitor 103SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 103SG201. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main substrate 11 and arranged above the substrate case 103SG201. In other words, the display monitor 103SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 103SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 103SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 103SG025A, a second pending display device 103SG025B capable of displaying the second pending memory number, a normal symbol display device 103SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal symbols, a normal pattern pending display device 103SG025C capable of displaying a normal pattern pending memory number, A round display 103SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and in a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) and jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 103SG002R. A game information display unit 103SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 103SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 103SG133 that lights up in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 103SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A uses two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 103SG025A and the second suspension display 103SG025B each have 4-segment LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 103SG025A and second pending display 103SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the section 103SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 103SG025A is lit, and the second pending When the two LEDs on the left of the display 103SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the jackpot types in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 103SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 103SG321 and a second movable body 103SG322 that can move between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 103SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 103SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321, and the second movable body 103SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. An origin detection sensor 103SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 103SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that designates the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the large winning opening to notify that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number, in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation. Variation data reading operation to read, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in the characteristic portion 103SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 10-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 10-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 10-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, super reach β, super reach α, since it is set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit becomes higher in the order of the variable display result "big hit", the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the variation content (performance content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may differ depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the variation pattern will be normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous performance three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variation patterns of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 10-7A and 10-7B are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". Further, when the gaming state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, setting 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characterizing section 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, setting If the value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability of the jackpot in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state. The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each set value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). good too.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as the "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and may vary the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a "small hit" depending on the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is defined as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is determined. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be a "jackpot" and the control to the jackpot game state will be higher (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Also, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In the present embodiment, a total of six set values, 1 to 6, are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figure 10-8 (A) and Figure 10-8 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 10-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 10-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 10-9. In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability-high base state, and the jackpot game. A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the game ends and the state shifts to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or the big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the big win game state ends. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is the so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is the highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 0 to 299 Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. (No decision value is assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the second special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined as the big hit B. In other words, the fact that the decision ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value means that one of the jackpot types is not decided (the decision ratio is 0%). However, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the big win type is determined to be the big win B. .

As described above, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, since the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs depending on the set value, the game interest can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

Further, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the jackpot probability, the easier it is for the jackpot C to be determined as the jackpot type). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. Furthermore, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the probability of a small win is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big win game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the setting values, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area A switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (a game state is changed to a variable state or a variable state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 10-10 (A) and 10-10 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), the variation pattern of normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), the variation pattern of super reach β big hit A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 10-10 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), when the setting value is "1", 1 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to 400 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 is super reach It is assigned to the β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "2", 1 to 380 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "3", 1 to 360 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 361 to 820 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the set value is "4", 1 to 340 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 341 to 805 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "5", 1 to 320 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 321 to 790 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "6", 1 to 300 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 301 to 775 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", , 1 to 200 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of super reach β jackpot. Also, if the set value is "2", 1 to 180 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 181 to 510 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 160 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "4", 1 to 140 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 141 to 430 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "5", 1 to 120 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 390 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "6", 1 to 100 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

Thus, when the jackpot A is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2) is the ratio of determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In addition, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, super reach β is likely to be determined when the type of the jackpot is "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", and the type of jackpot is "jackpot A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, a "jackpot B" or a "jackpot C" may occur. can raise the expectations of

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of 1 to 6, the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997 Among them, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In this embodiment, only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as a small hit variation pattern, Variation patterns for small hits with set values 1 to 6 may be determined at different rates from a plurality of variation patterns.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number is assigned as a judgment value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation within the range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), if the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 391 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 481 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 460 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", 1 to 400 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 401 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more total pending memories in the low base), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach deviation (PA2-1), and the super reach α variation pattern of deviation (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (D), in the variation pattern determination table for deviation D (for high base medium), when the set value is "1", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of deciding the normal reach fluctuation pattern are set to decrease in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are super reach α deviation fluctuation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviations, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Assigned to each variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is out, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the variation pattern of super reach It is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered due to the variable display by not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are completely the same between each set value as the variation pattern for loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value. , The present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern between non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the variation pattern of super reach β Although both determination ratios are exemplified in a form that is the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, super reach α Regardless of the setting value in which only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β is set, it may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the variation pattern of super reach β Although both determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the set value is the same. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, a form in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach and normal reach differs according to the set value is exemplified. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine any variation pattern (the determination ratio is 0%) or to set a specific variation pattern to 100% It also includes determining the ratio of

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit number of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not stored, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, in each loss variation pattern determination table of the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 6, the variation of super reach loss The random number ranges assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the probability of losing differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the variable display to be actually executed in the variation pattern of losing the super reach (the probability of losing the super reach) Appearance rate of variation pattern) is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach out according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. , The present invention is not limited to this, but considering the jackpot probability and the probability of losing for each set value, the variable display is super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. may be executed with a variation pattern of

Further, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 10-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characterizing portion 103SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 10-12(A), the display monitor 103SG029 includes a first display section 103SG029A, a second display section 103SG029B, a third display section 103SG029C, and a fourth display section 103SG029D. Each of the first display portion 103SG029A to the fifth display portion 103SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 103SG029A to fifth display section 103SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment is executed using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 103SG029, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (B) and 10-12 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 3rd out-out in all gaming states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentage on display monitor 103SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "L. ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A, and "1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B in order to display "b3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D.

In the display monitor 103SG029 of the present embodiment, the main substrate 11 (CPU 103) controls the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 to sequentially display them. For example, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. When it is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 103SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in green. 5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 103SG029, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", each base value in the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 103SG029 without executing the setting value change processing described later by the CPU 103. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. 10-13 is a flow chart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (103SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (103SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004;Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (103SGSa005).

If the set value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, and if the set value stored in RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (103SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (103SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010). move on.

At 103SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). If the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 103SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (103SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (103SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 103SGSa013d, RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation process (103SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 103SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, when the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the set value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the set value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is designated as an identifiable set value. A command is output to the effect control CPU 120 .

Also, in the set value confirmation process (103SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, when the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 103SG029 is terminated.

If the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF at 103SGSa011 (103SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d without executing the processes of 103SGSa013a to 103SGSa013c.

At 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (103SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 103SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 103SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e) , and proceed to 103SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes the process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as indicated by 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017 to 103SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except addresses that are

At 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), proceed to 103SGSa022; (103SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

In addition, at 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, ie, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (103SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

If the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened, the lock switch 103SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (103SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the processes 103SGSa009 to 103SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), and if the open sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (103SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting flashing of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029. (103SGSa024).

After executing 103SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (103SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (103SGSa026; N), the processing of 103SGSa025 and 103SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 103SG029 stops blinking (103SGSa027) and proceeds to 103SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, an example is illustrated in which all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko game machine 1, only a part of all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 103SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, in 103SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (103SGSa029), and the interrupt is permitted (103SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error) and the recovery from the power interruption during the setting change described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (103SGSa031). Furthermore, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (103SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (103SGSa034; N), the processing of 103SGSa033 and 103SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034; Y), a set value abnormal error 103SG029A, second display unit 103SG029B, third display unit 103SG029C, and fourth display unit 103SG029D constituting the display monitor 103SG029 as notification (error notification) of the recovery from the power failure during the occurrence of or setting change. is displayed (103SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGSa036), and the game is played through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 103SGSa032 to 103SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.), thereby displaying the display monitor 103SG029. , the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor 103SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are notified of the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (103SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON at 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined at 103SGSa014 that the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014 ;Y).

10-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 103SG194A Various command data and various flags stored with the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 103SGS271 (103SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), start Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the received command buffer (not shown) at the time of winning, 1 buffer number It shifts up by minutes (103SGS274). The content of the buffer number "2-0" is erased because it cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (103SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 103SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets 3 symbols as even numbers as the stop symbols. A combination of decoration patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, a combination of decoration patterns (jackpot pattern) in which the three patterns are "7" as the stop pattern. decide. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect determining process shown in FIG. 10-15, and determines whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the variable display (103SGS277).

(Effect during variable display)
The effect during the variable display includes, as a result of effect, an advantageous state suggestion result that suggests control to the jackpot game state, a setting suggestion result that suggests the setting of the set value performed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process, It is an effect (predetermined effect) that can be either. In this characteristic part 103SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a ready-to-win notice (announcement effect) that suggests the possibility of a big hit with the variable display mode becoming a reach as an effect in which the result of the effect is the result of suggesting an advantageous state. be. Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the setting values 1 to 6 the setting value is. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in which both the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion can be executed when the effect result can be either the advantageous state suggesting result or the setting suggesting result. When it is possible, it is possible to execute the ready-to-reach notice in which the performance result is the advantageous state suggestion result, prior to the setting suggestion in which the performance result is the setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 10-16, the effect during variable display has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9. When the execution is determined, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the basis of which the variable display effect is to be executed, that is, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the effect mode. It is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the effect during variable display based on.

As shown in FIGS. 10-18 (A) to (C), the effect during variable display starts at the timing when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variable display of the pattern (timing before the variable display mode becomes ready-to-win). Then, a plurality of (e.g., eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger rides fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area, The effect during variable display ends by fading out to the right side of the display area. In addition, while a plurality of images Z1 are moving toward the right side, an image Z2 may be displayed showing that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped. Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body breaks and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies break and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies will break and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies will break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies will break and fall. , in the case of pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of patterns PT-8 and PT-9, 8 bodies are destroyed and dropped.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-18 (B) and 10-19 (A), patterns PT-1 to PT-8 all have the same timing at which the paraglider is destroyed, and each pattern PT-1 to A number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 are destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number of them may be fine). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-19(B), pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like pattern PT-8. 8 is different. Specifically, 7 paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining 1 body is destroyed at the 2nd timing after the 1st timing when the other 7 bodies are destroyed. .

The production period of such a variable display production is executed based on which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, that is, the ready-to-reach notice in which the production result is an advantageous state suggestion result or the production result is a set suggestion result Regardless of which of the setting suggestions is to become and a non-common mode effect that can specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result (for example, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is displayed on the image display device 5, and a non-common effect period during which the effect of moving downward in the display area of No. 5) is executed.

In addition, in the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as an effect during the variable display, the decorative patterns are variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, but the decorative patterns are displayed in a smaller size than usual. Small symbols may be variably displayed at predetermined locations. Also, during the execution period of the effect during variable display, another notice effect or the like different from the effect during variable display may be executed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-16, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7. For patterns PT-8 and PT-9, which are specific patterns (specific modes) corresponding to the setting suggestion that suggests which one of ~ 6, and the number of paragliders destroyed is 8, It is a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to a reach notice that suggests the possibility of becoming a reach. In other words, during the variable display effect, the effect mode in the common effect period is the same, but the suggested target differs depending on the difference in the effect mode (the number of paragliders to be destroyed) in the non-common effect period, and 1 to 7 paragliders are displayed. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 bodies are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest the possibility that the set values are odd numbers (eg, 1, 3, 5), and patterns PT-2 and PT-4 suggest that the set values are even numbers. (eg, 2, 4, 6). 6 suggests that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (e.g., 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (e.g., 6). .

Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that any of set values 5 and 6 (high setting) is determined. The first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with a low expectation that the The second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high);

In this characteristic portion 103SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set low and the setting values 5 and 6 are high, but the setting values 1 to 3 may be low and the setting values 4 to 6 may be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

On the other hand, pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the pattern may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and pattern PT-9 suggests the possibility that the variable display of the pattern will be super reach. Suggest.

Regarding pattern PT-8, the first special pattern with low expectation of super reach by being determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the pattern is normal reach {reach notice (low), first specific mode}, and for pattern PT-9, the second special pattern {reach advance notice (high), second special mode}.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 is a special mode (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests control to the jackpot gaming state and a specific mode (for example, pattern PT-9) that suggests settings. 1 to PT-7), a variable display effect can be executed based on one of a plurality of types of effect modes including pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (predetermined effect of special mode) When setting suggestions (predetermined effects of specific aspects) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can all be executed, ready-to-win announcements can be executed with priority over setting suggestions.

In the first embodiment, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 are determined when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. Since the variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a loss than when the result is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 is a super reach, that is, the degree of expectation for a big hit is the pattern. While it is a lower pattern than PT-9, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is a loss, so the pattern PT-9 is , Super Reach, that is, a pattern with a higher expectation for a big hit than the pattern PT-8.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, in the effect during the variable display, the number of paragliders destroyed indicates the possibility of a big hit or which set value is set. It is not limited to this, and a big hit or high setting may be suggested by the appearance of a predetermined number (for example, 8) or more paragliders without destroying the paragliders. Furthermore, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and to suggest which set value is set, the production mode can be changed in various ways, for example, the number of appearances of characters, the type of characters that appear, etc. It may be possible to suggest a big hit or a set value by means of.

In addition, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider among the numbers corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. By outputting a specific sound or illuminating the game effect lamp 9 or the like when falling, it may be possible to notify that a big hit or a pattern with a high degree of expectation is set.

As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the process of determining effect during variable display, effect control CPU 120 first identifies the result of variable display and the variation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (loss, non-probability variable big win A, probability variable big win B, probability variable big win C, small win) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the . In addition, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area.

Then, while extracting the random number for determining the reach notice type, using the production (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. A lottery is held to determine the type of reach advance notice in the case where the game is to be played (103SGS292).

In the production (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. , and 60 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-9. In other words, when the variation pattern is super reach, PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than super reach.

When the variation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. there is In other words, when the variation pattern is normal reach, PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than normal reach.

Also, when the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to patterns PT-8 and PT-9. That is, if the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, the reach notice is not won.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the variation pattern is normal reach, the pattern PT-8 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is normal reach, and when the variation pattern is super reach, The pattern PT-9 is more likely to be won at a higher rate than the cases other than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, when the production based on the pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be a normal reach fluctuation pattern than the super reach fluctuation pattern, and when the production based on the pattern PT-9 appears, it is super than the normal reach fluctuation pattern. It is highly likely that it is a reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, the pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern, but there is a high possibility that it will be a normal reach, so it is a reach notice (low) with a low jackpot expectation, and the pattern PT-9 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Since there is a high possibility that it will be, it is a pattern of reach notice (high) with high expectations for big hits.

Returning to FIG. 10-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} has been won as a result of performing a lottery for the presence or absence of the reach notice execution and the type in 103SGS292. (103SGS293). If it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-9 is determined with priority over the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294), Go to 103SGS304.

If it is determined that pattern PT-9 is not won in 103SGS292, that is, if reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 is won, reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) } is won, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read out to specify the current setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (103SGS295). Next, while extracting the setting suggestion type determination random number, using the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the setting value specified in 103SGS295, whether or not setting suggestion is executed in the effect during variable display, A lottery is conducted to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 10-17(B), when the setting value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1. , 10 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 25 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-4, and pattern Four decision values are assigned to PT-5, one decision value is assigned to pattern PT-6, and one decision value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 25 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Five judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-5, and four judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. Determination values are assigned, and five determination values are assigned to pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the set value is an odd number of 1 or 3, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. If the set value is an even number 2 or 4, patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are likely to be won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and if the set value is 5 , pattern PT-5 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, pattern PT-6 wins at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It's getting easier. In addition, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the set value is 6, the set value of 6 is confirmed when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

Therefore, if the effects based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 where the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less, there is a high possibility that the setting value is one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider will be destroyed. If an effect based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 with 5 or more characters is likely to appear, there is a high possibility that the set value is either 5 or 6. In other words, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are set as setting suggestion (low) with low possibility of high setting (setting value 5 or 6), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are high setting (setting value 5 or 6) is set as a setting suggestion (high) with a high possibility.

In the first embodiment, the random number for determining the reach announcement type and the random number for determining the setting suggestion type are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of determination values of each determination random number is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number may be determined as appropriate. Just do it. In addition, determination random number counters for generating these determination random numbers are set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in the random number update process.

Returning to FIG. 10-15, the effect control CPU 120, as a result of performing the lottery of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion and the type in 103SGS296, any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} A decision is made as to whether or not the prize has been won (103SGS297). If it is determined that any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been elected, if the non-execution of the reach announcement is elected in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 When the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on is uniquely determined, and when the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298), and proceeds to 103SGS304.

In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was not won, that is, if the setting suggestion was not executed or if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won , Based on the non-execution of the setting suggestion or the winning of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at 103SGS297, it is determined whether the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is winning at 103SGS293 (103SGS300).

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was won in 103SGS300, when non-execution of setting suggestion is won in 103SGS297, execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is uniquely determined, and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is elected in 103SGS297, reach notice (low) based on the winning pattern PT-8 Execution is determined (103SGS301) over setting suggestions (low) based on patterns PT-1 through PT-4 and proceeds to 103SGS304.

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is not won in 103SGS300, it is determined whether any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won. If any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined (103SGS302), execution of the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. Also, if none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 have been won, that is, if the non-execution of both the reach notice and the setting suggestion is won, the variable display is being performed without determining the execution of the variable display effect. Terminate the effect determination process.

In 103SGS304, the effect type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any one of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the effect during variable display is executed. is set (103SGS305), and the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 10-14, after the variable display effect determination process of 103SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display effect execution determination flag is set at 103SGS278, that is, whether or not the variable display effect determination of 103SGS277 is performed. In the process, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display of any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined.

When the execution determination flag during variable display is set, the process advances to 103SGS279 to set the period until the start of the effect during variable display to the timer for waiting for the start of effect during variable display (103SGS279), and the effect during variable display is executed. Clear the decision flag (103SGS280) and go to 103SGS281. On the other hand, when the effect execution determination flag during variable display is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without going through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the effect during variable display, in this characteristic part 103SG, the timing at which the paraglider appears is the start timing of the effect during variable display. Since the effect during variable display is specified based on and is set to start the effect during variable display, the period until the start timing of effect during variable display is set to the timer for waiting to start the effect during variable display. The present invention is not limited to this. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the effect during variable display is started may be set in the variable display effect start waiting timer.

At 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (103SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the production control CPU 120 controls the variable display of the decoration pattern by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one to one, but the production control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (103SGS284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the obtained image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172) (103SGS286).

Thus, in the present embodiment 1, the effect control CPU 120, when executing the variable display of the symbols based on the reach variation pattern, after the start of the variable display before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode At performance timing, it is possible to execute either a reach notice or a setting suggestion as a performance during variable display, and when determining whether or not to execute the performance during variable display, the performance result is the result of suggesting an advantageous state. It is possible to execute the (special mode effect) with priority over the setting suggestion (specific mode effect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the effect determination process during variable display in FIG. take precedence over

That is, the effect control CPU120, in the lottery of the reach notice, if the variation pattern is super reach, to determine the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% (103SGS294), reach Notice (high) is executed at a higher rate (preferred) than setting suggestions. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is 60%. , even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296 based on the reach notice (low) winning, setting suggestion based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at 103SGS297 (high ) is not won, 103SGS301 will determine the execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, so the reach notice will be executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion (priority). Become.

In addition, the reach notice includes reach notice (low) and reach notice (high) that suggests that the ratio of control to a big hit is higher than the reach notice (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT -9 and the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are executable, the reach prediction (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is set to the pattern PT- 1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest caused by the effect during the variable display due to the excessive priority given to the advance notice and the restriction on the execution of the setting suggestion.

In addition, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) that suggests that there is a higher possibility that the setting is higher than the setting suggestion (low). -When both setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are executable, patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of the patterns PT-8 to PT-9 can be executed, the pattern PT-8 Predictive reach (low) based on 103SGS301 can be executed in preference to setting suggestions (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the effect during the variable display due to excessive priority given to the setting suggestion and the restriction on the execution of the ready-to-win announcement.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion. For more information, Reach Warning High precedes Setting Suggestion High, Setting Reach Warning High precedes Reach Warning Low, and Reach Warning Low precedes Setting Suggestion ( low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of "prediction of reach (high)>suggestion of setting (high)>prediction of reach (low)>suggestion of setting (low)".

In this characteristic part 103SG, it is sufficient that the execution ratio of the reach announcement is set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the effect during variable display is a effect executed during the variable display period of the pattern, and the ready-to-reach notice suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least It suggests which set value is not changed during the operating period. In addition, it is not preferable for the game arcade that setting suggestions are frequently made and the player can easily guess what the set value is. Therefore, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, and when the variable display effect is executed when the set value is high, it is preferable for the player to suggest either, but the set value is also suggested at another timing. However, since the suggestion of a big win can be made only during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that the ready-to-win notice appears at a higher rate than the set suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display production is a production that is executed only during the variable display period of the pattern based on the super reach fluctuation pattern or the normal reach fluctuation pattern, which has a higher expectation for big hits than the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display mode is a reach. In this case, the player's expectation for the big win is higher than in the case where the reach is not achieved. Therefore, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, particularly in the case of the jackpot reach fluctuation pattern, the player's expectation for the jackpot will decrease, and the production will become inappropriate. It is possible to prevent the presentation from becoming inappropriate by executing the notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, as a tendency of the effect during variable display, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, for example, it is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern and a high In some circumstances, such as setting, the execution ratio may be set such that the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach announcement.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the reach notice and the lottery for the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery for the reach notice is preferentially executed (before) the lottery for the setting suggestion. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution ratio of the ready-to-win announcement becomes higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, the setting suggestion lottery may be performed prior to the ready-to-reach announcement lottery. , the order is arbitrary. In addition, if the number of determination values in the effect type determination tables A and B is set so that the execution ratio of the reach announcement is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, It is not limited to what is described.

Incidentally, in the first embodiment, as an effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display, a mode is exemplified in which the setting suggestion suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be executed, but the present invention is described. is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion may indicate whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 has changed since the pachinko game machine 1 was started last time.

(First invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When it is possible to execute either setting suggesting effect, no consideration is given as to which effect is given priority, and when the control is in an advantageous state, the setting suggesting effect that makes the set value is executed, etc. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance becomes inappropriate. Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the first invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means, when both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed (for example, the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the variable display of the symbol was started (variable display mode is a timing before becoming a reach)), the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can be executed in FIG. 10- 15, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the ready-to-win announcement lottery, the execution of the ready-to-win announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined with priority over the setting suggestions in 103SGS294. Even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, 103SGS301 Reach notice (low ) is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4./Production control CPU 120, reach notice (high) > setting suggestion (high) > Reach notice (low) > Part that determines the execution of production based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at the ratio of setting suggestion (low) (see Figure 10-20 of modification 1))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance from being inappropriate due to the execution of the predetermined performance in the specific mode when the control is performed in the advantageous state.
Specifically, even if the variable display result is a big hit, setting suggestions that can be suggested even at timings other than the variable display are prioritized over the reach notice. , the player's expectation for the big win cannot be suitably increased, and the performance can be prevented from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., reach notice (low)) and a second special mode (e.g., reach notice (high)) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second special mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, , When the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the lottery for the ready-to-win announcement in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIGS. high) is determined prior to setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special mode. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display production determination process shown in FIG. 10-15 of the first embodiment, Part that determines the execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 with priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to excessive restriction on the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The specific mode includes a first specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (high )) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second specific mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, , If any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. -Part that determines the execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 with priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific mode. (For example, if the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the lottery for the reach notice in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-15 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 The part that prioritizes the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode being excessively restricted.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
Action prompt notification means capable of executing action prompt notification prompting the player to perform an action (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation prompt effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. executable part.) and
Action detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific action (for example, action of operating push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the action promotion notification by the action promotion notification means is being executed. When,
with
The predetermined effect execution means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific action by the action detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can press the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific action to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A portion that can execute an effect to change to the image Z2 (destroy the paraglider and make it fall).Modification)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a player who knows the specific action can execute the predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The predetermined effect is a common effect period during which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed (for example, either a reach notice or a setting suggestion) A common effect period during which an effect is executed in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area regardless of whether there is a common effect period) and the predetermined special mode. A non-common effect period that can specify whether it is the effect or the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, it is possible to specify whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion, that is, the number of images Z2 according to the effect pattern is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward in the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIGS. 10-18)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by having the common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player as to whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode will be executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect of a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state and also suggests settings (for example, it is possible to execute both the reach notice and the setting suggestion). Sometimes, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) is displayed (for example, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, an image of a moving paraglider with a character appearing, etc.) is displayed. parts, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the ready-to-reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) are executable means, for example, the suggestion about the display result of one variable display. Any timing may be used as long as it is the timing at which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the pending memory If the display result is suggested, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the period over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage is executed and during the execution period of the variable display. . In addition, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

In addition, when both reach notice (predetermined effect of special mode) and setting suggestion (predetermined effect of specific mode) can be executed, reach notice can be executed with priority over setting suggestion. The lottery is executed with priority over the lottery of the setting suggestion, and the execution of the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is preceded by the execution of the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 and executing reach announcements based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It should be noted that executing the reach notice at a rate higher than the setting suggestion includes the case where the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100% and the setting suggestion is not executed, that is, the reach notice execution rate is 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the number of destroyed paragliders suggests the possibility of a big hit or a set value, that is, the variable display effect that is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executable. , the effect result is either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executed when both can be executed. Both the advantageous state suggesting result and the setting suggesting result may be included as the effect during variable display.

That is, in the first embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common common effect period between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the reach notice and the setting suggestion have different production modes (the common effect period It does not have a corresponding period) may be a separate production (specifically, the reach announcement is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the characteristic portion 103SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-20. 10-20, (A) is a flowchart showing the process of determining effects during variable display as Modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing execution ratios of reach notice and setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the lottery of the presence or absence of the execution of the reach notice and the type of the reach notice is performed with priority over the presence or absence of the execution of the setting suggestion and the lottery of the type, so that the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and lottery for ready-to-win notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-20(A), in the process of determining effect during variable display, effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS311). Next, a random number for determining the effect type is extracted, and whether or not the effect during variable display (prediction of reach/suggestion of setting) is executed using a table C (not shown) for determining the type of effect (notice of reach/suggestion of setting), A lottery is conducted to determine the type of reach advance notice or setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS312).

Although not shown, the effect (reach notice/setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown) sets the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 according to the type of variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, the determination ratio of the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 varies depending on the type of variation pattern and the setting values 1 to 6, but the execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion shown in FIG. 10-20 (B) As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, the reach notice is determined (prioritized) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. (For example, 50% reach notice, 40% setting suggestion, and 10% non-execution are determined).

Also, for example, if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, reach notice (high) is higher than reach notice (low) (for example, reach notice (high) 40%, reach notice (low) 10%) is preferably determined by Also, if the setting values are high setting values 5 and 6, the ratio of setting suggestion (high) to setting suggestion (low) is higher than setting suggestion (high) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35%, setting suggestion (low) is 5 %). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 is the ratio of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low) of the effect based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 Decide to execute.

Further, in the first embodiment and modified example 1, the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is exemplified as a form that is determined based on the variation pattern and the setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, Depending on the variation pattern, the set value, and the result of the variable display, the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be different. Specifically, regardless of whether the variation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach variation pattern, when the hit is a big hit, the reach notice is given priority over the setting suggestion at a higher rate than when the loss occurs. is preferred.

Further, in the first embodiment and modified example 1, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either one of the ready-to-reach notice and the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during the variable display. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, the effect result of the effect during variable display is It is also possible to make it possible to execute a specific effect that is a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result.

As the specific effect, for example, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-18, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, the character (e.g., displaying an image in which a paraglider appears), or displaying an image in which the display mode of the paraglider (e.g., color, size, movement speed, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode. It may be displayed, the background color may be changed, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special effect sound may be output in accordance with the image display of the paraglider, or a light emitting body may emit light in a special light emission mode.

Further, in the first embodiment and the modified example 1, when the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, that is, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the effect during the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the variable display effect, the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be made variable. Each of them may be independently executable at a performance timing different from the presentation during display.

Specifically, for example, a ready-to-reach notice in a manner different from the ready-to-reach notice shown in FIGS. On the other hand, setting suggestions in a manner different from the setting suggestions shown in FIGS. It may be executable.

In Example 1 of the characterizing part 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the effect during variable display can be executed only once during one variable display was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the variable display of , the effect during variable display may be executed a plurality of times.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-21(A) as the second embodiment, the first period is between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the normal reach effect for the variation pattern of the normal reach and the super reach. Effect during variable display can be executed in a second period after the first period.

Since the variable display time for non-reach and small hit variation patterns is too short to execute the effect during variable display twice or more, in the second embodiment, the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach are the targets for execution of the effect during variable display. However, non-reach and small hit variation patterns may be included as targets for execution of effects during variable display.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, whether or not to execute the variable display effect is determined according to the variation pattern using the variable display effect execution determination table shown in FIG. determined by different percentages. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-21(B), when the variation pattern is normal reach, 40 out of 100 variable-display effect execution determination random numbers are stored in the variable-display effect execution determination table. are assigned to the execution of the effect during variable display, and 60 are assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display. Further, when the variation pattern is super reach, 60 of the 100 variable-display effect execution determination random numbers are assigned to the execution of the variable-display effect execution in the variable-display effect execution determination table. are assigned to non-execution of effects during variable display.

In the second embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, the effect during variable display is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 10-21(A).

When the execution of the effect during variable display is determined when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, as shown in FIGS. Execution of setting suggestion and ready-to-reach notice is determined at different ratios between the effect during variable display and the effect during variable display executed during the second period. In the same period, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution ratio of setting suggestion and ready-to-win notice is set to be the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-23, when the execution of the effect during variable display is determined when the variation pattern is normal reach, the effect type during variable display (effect pattern) is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the setting value set in pachinko machine 1. , pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation (high)) at a rate of 40%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is patterned at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) was determined, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation) at a rate of 60% (high)).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is normal reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT- at a rate of 1% 5 to PT-7 {Suggestion setting (high)}, 35% decided pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5% pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 1.2% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, 2.2% determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 55% determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, at a rate of 1.5% decided to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, at a rate of 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 2% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 3.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. One of {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 5% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, and 35% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 and 10-26, when the variation pattern is super reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, it is executed in the first period. The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ PT-7 decided to {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 15%, pattern PT-9 {reach notice at a rate of 25% (high)}. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 1.2% determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, 2.2% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 decided to {setting suggestion (low)}, at a rate of 1.5% decided to one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 2% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, 15% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 3.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. One of {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 5% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, and 15% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach The rate (60%) at which the execution of notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach It is set higher than the percentage (40%) at which execution of advance notice (low) or reach advance notice (high)} is determined.

Therefore, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the ready-to-reach notice, which is a result of suggesting an advantageous state. It is possible to heighten expectations for a big hit.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 to 10-26, any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) Or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined Then, regarding the effect type of the variable display effect executed in the second period, the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined to be executed. Any one of PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion to set (low) or suggestion to set (high)} is set higher than the determined rate.

That is, the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 corresponding to the reach announcement are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion are determined in the second period. By being determined at a lower rate than the first period in the period, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period, and the reach notice is executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion in the second period. .

For this reason, for example, after the reach notice (high) is executed as the effect during the variable display in the first period, the reach notice (low) is executed as the effect during the variable display in the second period, that is, during the variable display As the effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice is executed so that the expectation of the reach notice is lowered (so-called downfall), or the reach notice (high) is executed at the first time, so that the variable display Since the player can predict that there is a high possibility that the variable display will be super reachable before the reach notice is executed twice, the player's expectation for the variable display being super reachable is lowered. It is designed so that it can be suppressed.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 to 10-26, the effect during variable display executed in the second period is more favorable than the effect during variable display executed in the first period. However, the rate at which any one of pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} is determined as the effect type is set high. That is, as the effect during variable display is executed, the effect during variable display is more likely to be executed in pattern PT-9, so the game for the effect during variable display being executed in pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-8. It can sustain people's expectations.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the effect during variable display is executed twice in the first period and the second period. However, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more. In the case where the effect during variable display is executed three or more times in this way, by setting the determination ratio of the effect type so that the pattern PT-9 is likely to be determined each time the effect during variable display is executed, It may be possible to maintain the technician's sense of expectation for a longer period of time.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 to 10-26, the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period have pattern PT- as the effect type. 1 to PT-7 {Suggestion of setting (low) or suggestion of setting (high)} are determined at different rates, so the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during the second period are executed. It is difficult for setting suggestions to be executed continuously during the variable display effect. In other words, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to monotony of the effect during variable display due to execution of setting suggestions in both of these two effects during variable display.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 to 10-26, the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period have pattern PT- 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} are determined differently, so the variable display effect executed in the first period and the second period are executed It is difficult to continuously execute the reach notice with the effect during variable display. In other words, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to monotony of the effect during the variable display due to execution of the ready-to-win announcement in both of these two effects during the variable display.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 to 10-26, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. In the case of executing, the form in which the rate of execution of reach notice is different as the effect during variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is controlled in the first period In the case of executing the effect during variable display and the case of executing the effect during variable display in the second period, the rate at which the ready-to-win announcement is executed as the effect during variable display may be the same. By doing so, when the effect during the variable display is executed in the first period and the second period, the ready-to-reach notice is executed as the effect during the variable display in the first period and the second period. , the player can be expected in the same way.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 to 10-26, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, if the variable display forewarning effect is executed in the same period. Although the rate at which the reach notice is determined to be executed is the same as the effect during variable display, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the notice effect during variable display executed during the same period , the rate at which the execution of the ready-to-win notice is determined as the effect during variable display may differ according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁By doing so, according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the rate at which the ready-to-win notice is executed as the effect during the variable display changes in the first period and the second period, so that the variable display It is possible to prevent the middle production from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment 2, as shown in FIGS. Regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the rate of determining the execution of any pattern PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same rate, and the rate of determining the reach notice (pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9 execution ratio) is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine. Similarly, focusing on the effect during variable display executed in the second period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (the ratio of determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7) It is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the ratio that determines the reach notice (the ratio that determines the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set in the pachinko machine. It is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value.

Therefore, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6, the effect during variable display executed during the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time) always Setting suggestions are executed at a rate of 60% and reach notices are executed at a rate of 40%, and the variable display effect executed in the second period (second variable display effect) is always set at a rate of 40%. Since the suggestion is executed and the ready-to-win announcement is executed at a rate of 60%, the player can be made to expect the execution of the setting suggestion in the same way.

In addition, in the second embodiment, since the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, there are more opportunities to provide reach notices and setting suggestions in one variable display, which improves interest. .

More specifically, when only the reach notice can be executed independently in relation to the display result of one variable display, the setting suggestion is performed at a timing other than during the variable display (for example, the ending of the jackpot game state or the variable display However, when the player is playing the game, it is during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays the most attention. Therefore, in the effect during variable display in which both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed, it is possible not only to execute the setting suggestion during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays the most attention to, but also as in the second embodiment. As described above, by enabling the effect during variable display to be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, it is possible to not only increase the chances of executing the setting suggestion, but also to increase the chances of executing the setting suggestions. If it is executed at a rate higher than , it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the ready-to-win announcement in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of the ready-to-win announcement even in the variation pattern of the big win.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and non-execution of neither reach announcement nor setting suggestion may be determined in at least one of the first period and the second period.

In the case where non-execution can be determined in this way, even if the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution ratio of the reach notice must be different between the first period and the second period. can let Further, even if the execution ratio of the reach announcement is set to be the same between the first period and the second period, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion can be made different between the first period and the second period.

(Second Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the second invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When it is possible to execute either setting suggesting effect, no consideration is given as to which effect is given priority, and when the control is in an advantageous state, the setting suggesting effect that makes the set value is executed, etc. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance becomes inappropriate. Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the second invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display setting suggestion based on, or a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 can be executed),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, as a second embodiment, As shown, during variable display of normal reach or super reach, the predetermined effect is executed at the second number of times after the first number of times among the plurality of times than when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of times among the plurality of times. When executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a higher rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 The reach based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is better in the case of executing the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period than in the case of executing the effect during variable display. The part where the notice is executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special mode is more likely to be executed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be heightened at a timing close to one game result.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-22, in the effect during variable display executed in the second period, the ready-to-reach notice is more likely to be executed than in the effect during variable display executed in the first period. It is possible to heighten expectations for being controlled to the big win game state during the second period, which is closer to the end timing of the variable display than the first period.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing the predetermined effect in the specific mode at a rate lower than the rate of executing the predetermined effect in the specific mode in the first number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-22 as the second embodiment, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during variable display in the first period in the second period after the first period. A part that executes a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns, at a lower rate when executing a variable display effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the sense of expectation for an advantageous state by making it easier to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at a timing close to one game result.
Specifically, even if non-execution of the variable display effect cannot be determined, it is possible to determine the ready-to-win notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined effect execution means is
When executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22 as a second embodiment Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, the setting suggestion based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is changed to the special pattern PT- 8 or the part that runs at a higher rate than the reach notice based on pattern PT-9),
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22 as the second embodiment Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period, the ready-to-reach notice based on the special pattern pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is changed to the specific pattern pattern PT-1 to The part that runs at a higher rate than suggested by any of the PT-7)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special mode is more likely to be executed, while the predetermined effect of the specific mode is less likely to be executed. It is possible to suitably increase the sense of expectation.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7 The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the variable display effect process),
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a special aspect or a specific aspect of the predetermined effect in one variable display, thereby improving interest.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-21, a mode is exemplified in which the production during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the ready-to-win production. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect during variable display may be executed even during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7 The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern by executing the effect processing during variable display),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is Part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a pre-reading notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until start)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the set mode can be executed before the variable display as one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode, which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform reach notice and setting suggestion). When both are executable, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, when displaying a paraglider image Z1, the paraglider in which the character appears moves image, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player for execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Third invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the third invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect during variable display),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a first suggestion mode for suggesting settings (for example, setting suggestions (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4), and settings and types suggested by the first suggestion mode. A second suggestion mode (for example, setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-7) that makes suggestions regarding different settings of
When the predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing both the predetermined effect of the first suggested mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggested mode when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, as the second embodiment shown in FIG. 10-21, during variable display of normal reach and super reach), when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect is executed after the first number of the plurality of times. When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode can be executed at a higher rate (for example, FIGS. 10-23 to 10-26 and FIGS. As shown in -31, when the production control CPU 120 can execute the production during variable display in the first period and the second period during the variable display of normal reach or super reach as the second or third embodiment, The part where the setting suggestion (strong) is executed at a higher rate when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period than when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined performance is repeatedly executed, the execution of the predetermined performance of the second suggestive mode becomes easier, so that the player's expectation for the execution of the predetermined performance of the second suggestive mode is maintained. can be done.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 to 10-26, in the effect during variable display executed during the second period, setting suggestions (strong) are made more than during the effect during variable display executed during the first period. is easily executed, it is possible to keep the player's expectation for the high set value such as 4 to 6 set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

In the second embodiment, the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, which is the first suggestion mode for suggesting the setting, suggests the odd number setting or the even number setting, and the first suggestion The setting suggestion (high) based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7, which is the second suggestion mode that makes a suggestion about a setting different in type from the setting suggested by the mode, is a mode that suggests an intermediate setting or higher or the highest setting. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The set value suggested by the mode and the set value suggested by the second suggestion mode may all be different set values (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests the set value 1 and the second suggestion mode suggests the set value 1). If the value 6 is suggested, or if the first suggestion mode suggests odd settings 1, 3, 5 and the second suggestion mode suggests even settings 2, 4, 6, etc.), the first suggestion mode suggests Both the setting value suggested by the second suggestion mode and the setting value suggested by the second suggestion mode may include a common setting value (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests setting values 1 to 4, and the second suggestion mode is When suggesting set values 3 to 6 above the middle), even if one of the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode is a suggestion regarding a setting change, and the other is a suggestion regarding a setting value that has been set. good. In other words, not only when the set values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode are different, but also when there are a plurality of set values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode, the settings to be suggested Including those with different numbers and ranges of values, and those with different suggested contents.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means specifies when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, including the first suggestive mode and the second suggestive mode. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period. Portion where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is executed at the same rate in the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be similarly expected.
Specifically, after setting the execution ratio of all setting suggestions to be the same in the first period and the second period (or a lower ratio in the second period than in the first period), the effect during variable display in the first period By executing the setting suggestion (strong) at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing , avoiding excessive setting suggestions At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the high set value.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined effect execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on a special pattern pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the control is in an advantageous state,
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a rate higher than the rate of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode in the first number of times (e.g., Embodiment 2 As shown in FIG. 10-22, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period rather than executing the effect during variable display in the first period. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the ratio of execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode increases, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be heightened at a timing close to one game result.
Note that, in the second embodiment, if the execution ratio of all setting suggestions is the same between the first period and the second period, setting suggestions (strong) can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period. However, it is possible to make it possible to execute the reach announcement at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7 The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the variable display effect process),
The predetermined effect execution means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a special aspect or a specific aspect of the predetermined effect in one variable display, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and the effect control as shown in FIG. The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the variable display effect process),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is Part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a pre-reading notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until start)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the set mode can be executed before the variable display as one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode, which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are executable, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, when displaying the image Z1 of the paraglider, the paraglider in which the character appears moves image, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Fourth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following fourth invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-21 as the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect. part),
When executing the predetermined effect in a first number of times out of a plurality of times, and when executing the predetermined effect in a second number of times after the first number of times out of a plurality of times, the predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and after the first period. The part where the ratio of executing the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 differs between the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period of )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the probability of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode differs between the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion as the effect during variable display at a higher rate than the execution of the ready-to-win notice in the first period, while in the second period , by determining the execution of the setting suggestion as the effect during the variable display at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion in the second period, which is the timing close to the variable display result, Since the ready-to-win notice is easily executed, the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced. In addition, in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions may be determined at a lower rate than the reach notice execution, while in the second period, the setting suggestions may be decided at a higher rate than the reach notice execution. .

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period, pattern PT-8. Or the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.
In addition, in the second embodiment, if non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the ready-to-reach notice can be made the same while the setting suggestion execution ratio is different between the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at different ratios when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-22 as a second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and during the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate when executing the production)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, in the first period, while determining the execution of the setting suggestion at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, in the second period, by determining the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate lower than the execution of the reach notice In the second period, which is the timing close to the variable display result, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion, but it is also easy to execute the ready-to-win notice, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of a plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display in the period, regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the effect control CPU 120 Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate regardless of the set value when executing the effect during variable display in the second period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, it is set The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period. Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Fifth Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-21 as the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect. part),
When the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set and when the second setting value different from the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set, a plurality of times. Among them, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the same rate in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. Regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60%, and the effect during the variable display executed in the second period is set regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes suggestions at a rate of 40%)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first set value or the second set value is set, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times does not change, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode does not change. You can expect the same.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 to 10-26, regardless of which value from 1 to 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, it is executed in the first period. The ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display and the ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display that is executed in the second period do not change, that is, the set value is Since the situation of setting suggestions is the same regardless of whether the low setting value or the high setting value is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the setting value depending on the appearance situation of the setting suggestions.

In the second embodiment, even if any value from 1 to 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during the variable display executed in the first period. Although the ratio (appearance situation) at which setting suggestion is executed as the effect during the variable display executed in the second period does not change from the ratio (appearance situation) at which setting suggestions are executed during the second period is exemplified, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the first period for at least two setting values (for example, 1 and 2) out of the plurality of setting values 1 to 6; If the ratio (appearance situation) at which setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display executed in the second period is the same, setting values other than the two setting values (for example, 3 to 6) are The rate at which setting suggestions are executed (appearance situation) may not be the same between the first period and the second period.

Furthermore, the set values 1 to 6 are set for the pachinko game machine 1 only in one of the variable display performances executed in the first period and the variable display performances executed in the second period. Regardless of which value is set, the ratio (appearance situation) of setting suggestion as a variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period The ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestions are executed may be the same.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period) , the part that executes the reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effects of the mode at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the second period). The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is executed at a different rate in the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of a plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-22 as the second embodiment, variable Regarding the effect during display, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the effect during variable display executed during the second period is set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes the reach notice at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.
More specifically, when any of the set values 1 to 6 is set, the state of appearance of the reach notice is the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the state of appearance of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, it is set In the case where the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 at a different rate according to the setting value and the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period, it is set Part that executes reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates according to the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the first period and the second period are set between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the normal reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any period other than the above can be set as long as it is a period from the start to the end of the variable display to the display of the result of the variable display. For example, the first period is from the start to the end of Normal Reach, the second period is from the start to the end of Super Reach, or the first period is from the start of Normal Reach or Super Reach, and the second period is Normal Reach. Or until the end of the super reach, the variation pattern temporarily stops the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then resumes the variable display, so that one variable display is simulated multiple times. In the case of a pseudo-continuous variation pattern with a pseudo-continuous effect that looks like variable display, the first period is the start timing of the first re-variable display, the second period is the start timing of the second re-variable display, etc. , may correspond to the re-variable display period.

In the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and if the effect during variable display is the same number of times, reach regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The form which determines execution of an advance notice and execution of a setting suggestion in the same ratio was illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. In the case of making it possible to execute times, the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 even if the same number of variable display performances are performed. You may

Incidentally, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, as shown in FIGS. Execution of the setting suggestion and the reach notice is determined at the same ratio with the effect during the variable display executed in .

Here, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is normal reach, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed is determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. -8 {Suggestion of setting (high)}, 30% decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5% to pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} decide. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined at a rate of 63% to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and a rate of 2%. Determined as pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 30% determined pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5% determined pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 58.8%. Determined to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 35% advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 35%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 1.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 40%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 45% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined at a rate of 47% to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and a rate of 3%. decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 45%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at a rate of 5% advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {Suggestion setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion setting (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 50% advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. 4. Effect types (effect patterns) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period are determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 41.5%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 50%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 55% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and at a rate of 6%. decided on pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, decided on pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 and 10-31, when paying attention to the case where the variation pattern is super reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Pattern PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 17.5%, pattern PT at a rate of 17.5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%; At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 30% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 58.8%. PT-4 {Suggestion to set (low)}, 1.2% of the pattern PT-5 to PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)}, 20% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 20%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. , Pattern PT5 ~ Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 35 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {Suggestion to set (Low)}, and 1.5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion to set (High)}, 22.5% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 22.5%, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 22.5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , Pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined at a rate of 2.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} determined at a rate of 5%, 40 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, 2% determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)}, 25% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%; At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 45% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {Suggestion to set (low)}, 3.5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion to set (high)}, 27.5% At a rate of 27.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 27.5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , Pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined at a rate of 4.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} determined at a rate of 5%, 50 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, 5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)}, 30% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 30%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%; At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6, during the first period Patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion of set value (low) or suggestion of setting (high)} are determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the second period, and the variable display executed in the second period. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are determined as the effect type of the medium effect is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the setting suggestion result in the same way.

Furthermore, the rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the first period and in the second period The rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the same manner is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the ready-to-win announcement is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the advantageous state suggestion result in the same way.

On the other hand, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period or the second period, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is the first set value (for example, the set value 1) and the second set value. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion of setting value (low) or suggestion of setting value (high)} are determined as the effect type is different when the setting value (for example, setting value 6) is set. , 1st set value or 2nd set value, the appearance state of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period is changed, so that the performance during the variable display can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period, a pattern is used as the effect type each time the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 increases. The ratio of PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is reduced, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice ( high)} is determined. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is set with high setting values (for example, 5, 6), the setting suggestions are higher than when the pachinko game machine 1 is set with low setting values (for example, 1 to 4). is difficult to execute, it is difficult for a player who recognizes the effect during variable display to specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment as well, the pattern PT-9 is used as the effect type for the during-variable-display effect executed in the second period rather than the during-variable-display effect executed in the first period. The rate at which {suggestion of setting (high)} is determined is set high. In other words, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the ready-to-reach notice based on the pattern PT-9, so that the player's expectation for the effect during the variable display being executed in the pattern PT-9 is maintained. can be made

In addition, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-27, even if the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, during the variable display executed in the first period The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} are determined is the same between the effect and the effect during variable display executed in the second period, Pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined in the same form, but the present invention is not limited to this. , even if the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are the same, the pattern PT-1 is obtained between the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period. ~ PT-7 {Set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} may be different, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} may be determined differently.

In the third embodiment, the effects during variable display are the same when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period. Although the mode of executing the setting suggestion is exemplified by the ratio, the present invention is not limited to this. The setting suggestion may be executed at a different rate as the effect during the variable display depending on whether the effect during the variable display is executed. By doing so, the ratio (appearance rate) at which setting suggestions are executed changes between when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-27, the effect during variable display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the first period (first effect during variable display) and the variable display performed during the second period When the ready-to-win announcement is executed as a middle effect (second variable display-in-time effect), a form of executing the ready-to-win announcement at a different rate according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified in the same number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the reach notice is executed as (second variable display effect), the reach notice is given at the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 if the same number of variable display effect is performed. may be executed. By doing so, if the performance during variable display is the same number of times, the rate at which the ready-to-win notice is executed (appearance situation) does not change according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. , the player can be made to expect the execution of the ready-to-win notice without change between the performance during variable display executed in the first period and the performance during variable display executed in the second period.

(Sixth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following sixth invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in the third embodiment, a portion that can execute the effect during variable display in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect),
When executing the predetermined effect in a first number of times out of a plurality of times, and when executing the predetermined effect in a second number of times after the first number of times out of a plurality of times, the predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed. It is possible to execute at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and The part where the setting suggestions are executed at the same rate as in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period later)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be similarly expected.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-27, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period. Since the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio (65% in the example shown in FIG. 10-27) as the middle effect, it is set for the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period. Players can similarly expect suggestions to be implemented.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate when executing the middle effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at different ratios when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, A pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period is a special pattern rather than the effect during the variable display in the first period. The part that executes a high percentage of reach announcements based on PT-8 or pattern PT-9)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
In addition, in the third embodiment, if non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the ready-to-reach announcement can be made different between the first period and the second period while making the execution ratio of the setting suggestion the same.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, Regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the case where the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period , regardless of the set value, the part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.
More specifically, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 6, the state of appearance of the reach notice is the same, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the state of appearance of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and the effect control CPU 120 is the second period Part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value when executing the effect during variable display)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Seventh invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following seventh invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, a portion where the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect),
When the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set and when the second setting value different from the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set, a plurality of times. Among them, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at a different rate in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. If executed, the part that can execute setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 at different rates according to the set values)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, depending on whether the first set value or the second set value is set, the state of appearance of the predetermined performance of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times changes, so that the predetermined performance can be suppressed from becoming monotonous. .
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 to 10-31, depending on which one of 1 to 6 the value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is, the effect control CPU 120 is variably displayed in the first period. Since the setting suggestion execution ratio (appearance situation) changes between when the middle effect is executed and when the variable display during effect is executed in the second period, the player can obtain not only the result of the setting suggestion but also the predetermined number of times. It is possible to predict the setting value according to the appearance situation of the setting suggestion in .

The gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effects of the mode at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the first period and the second The part that can execute the reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate as the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at different ratios (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period, Part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different ratios)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of a plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, Regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the case where the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period , regardless of the set value, the part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.
More specifically, when any of the set values 1 to 6 is set, the state of appearance of the reach notice is the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the state of appearance of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and the effect control CPU 120 is the second period Part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value when executing the effect during variable display)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In Example 2 and Example 3 of the characterizing part 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display. and the second period each based on the fluctuation pattern and the setting value to determine which one of the reach notice and setting suggestion is to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for the first period determines whether to execute reach notice or setting suggestion based on the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, while for the second period, reach notice and setting suggestion based on the fluctuation pattern and set value It may be determined which one is to be executed, that is, whether the effect to be executed in the first period or the second period is to be executed based on different judgment criteria.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 as a fourth embodiment, a first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the ready-reach effect of the normal reach and the first period for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach and the super reach are targeted. A performance during variable display can be executed in a second period after one period. Since the variable display time for non-reach and small hit variation patterns is short to execute the variable display effect twice or more, in the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern of normal reach and super reach is the target for execution of the variable display effect. is limited to

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, if the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of variable display effect is determined based on the set value for the first period, For the second period, a process of determining the type of effect during variable display is executed based on the variation pattern. 10-33, the processing for determining effect during variable display in the fourth embodiment will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 10-33, in the process of determining effects during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies a variation pattern (103SGS311). The variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. Next, determine whether the specified variation pattern is normal reach or super reach (103SGS312), proceed to 103SG313 in the case of normal reach or super reach, and if other than normal reach or super reach, that is, non-reach or small hit variation pattern In this case, since it is not subject to the effect during variable display, the process for determining the effect during variable display is terminated.

In 103SGS312, if the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read to specify the current setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (103SGS313). Next, based on the set value specified in 103SGS313, whether or not to execute the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect type (effect pattern) in the case of execution are determined in a variable display effect execution determination table (not shown) ( normal reach/super reach) (103SGS314).

As shown in FIG. 10-34 (A), in 103SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 uses a variable display effect execution determination table common to normal reach or super reach, and uses reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. Decide on either Specifically, when the set value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of reach notice (low) at a rate of 40%, determines setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and non-execution at a rate of 10%. Decide on a percentage. Further, in the case of the setting value 6, execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice is determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion is set It is set such that the larger the value, the higher the setting suggestion execution ratio and the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-35, focusing on the determination ratio of the effect type during variable display in the first period, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the first period The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed at the rate of 20% is decided to be non-execution, and the ratio of 39% is decided to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}. Then, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} are determined at a rate of 1%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

40. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 18%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 8%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 1.2%, The pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

43. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 15%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 1.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 12.5%, Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {suggestion of setting (low)} are determined at a rate of 45.5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} are determined at a rate of 2%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

46. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 10%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 3.5%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 40% to determine the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}.

Returning to FIG. 10-33, at 103SGS314, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display in the first period has been determined (103SGS315). -9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS316), and a variable display effect execution determination flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined is set (103SGS317), Go to 103SGS318. If execution is not determined at 103SGS315, that is, if non-execution is determined, proceed to 103SGS318.

Next, in 103SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is the normal reach (103SGS318), and when it is determined as the normal reach, based on the specified variation pattern and the set value, the second Whether or not to execute the effect during variable display during the period and the type of effect (effect pattern) in the case of execution are determined using a not shown effect execution determination table during variable display (for normal reach) (103SGS319).

As shown in FIG. 10-34(B), at 103SGS319, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect execution determination table during variable display for normal reach, and determines any of reach advance notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, in the case of the set value 1, determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and does not execute at a rate of 5%. Decide on a percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and setting suggestion are determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( High) is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-36, focusing on the case of normal reach for the determination ratio of the notice effect type during variable display in the second period, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1 determines that the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion ( Decided to pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, At a rate of 5%, pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined.

32. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 8%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2.2%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

32. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 3%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55% , the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

30. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Pattern PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 4.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 29%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 6%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55% , the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

Further, when it is determined in 103SGS318 that the variation pattern is not the normal reach, that is, the super reach, based on the specified variation pattern and the set value, whether or not to execute the effect during the variable display in the second period, and the execution The type of effect (effect pattern) to be used is determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for super reach) (103SGS320).

As shown in FIG. 10-34(C), at 103SGS320, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect execution determination table during variable display for super reach, and determines any of reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution. . Specifically, in the case of the set value 1 and the set value 6, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and does not execute do not decide Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and setting suggestion are determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( High) is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-36, focusing on the case of super ready-to-win with respect to the determination ratio of the notice effect type during variable display in the second period, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In the case, the production type (production pattern) of the production during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 36%, and 4% Decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-9 {at a rate of 55% reach notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 4.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.5%. Determined to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 5% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 33.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 6.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {setting suggestion (low)} decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 8%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 5% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

Returning to FIG. 10-33, in 103SGS319 or 103SGS320, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display in the second period is determined (103SGS321), and if execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1 to PT-9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS322), and a variable display effect execution determination flag indicating that execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined is set (103SGS323 ), ending the effect during variable display. If execution is not determined in 103SGS321, that is, if non-execution is determined, the effect during variable display is terminated.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period of the plurality of times, regardless of whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the set value is 1 to 6, and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period, it is determined whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Determine reach warnings or setting suggestions based on separate decision tables. That is, since the criteria for determining which of the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion are to be executed are different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to prevent the production during variable display from becoming monotonous.

In addition, since the execution ratio of the setting suggestion in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion in the second period, the setting suggestion is likely to be executed in the first period, while the reach announcement is made in the second period Since it is easier to execute, setting suggestions are not likely to be executed in both the first period and the second period, even though it becomes normal reach or super reach in the second period, and Since the reach advance notice is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is likely to be executed in the second period, the setting suggestion and the reach notice can be executed in a well-balanced manner.

In addition, since the execution ratio of the reach notice in the second period is higher than the execution ratio of the reach notice in the first period, the reach notice is executed in both the first period and the second period. It is possible to suppress the middle production from becoming monotonous. However, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 to 10-37, focusing on each set value, when executing the effect during variable display in the first period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 Execution of the reach notice is determined at the same ratio (40%), and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period, the reach notice is executed regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. It is determined by the same ratio (60%). For this reason, regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, in the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period, The player's attention can be drawn in the same way.

Also, even if the setting value is high (for example, the setting value is 5, 6, etc.), in the case of normal reach or super reach, not only is the reach notice more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion in the second period, but the super reach In this case, since the reach notice (high) is likely to be executed, it is possible to suppress the player's expectation for the big win from being lowered.

Furthermore, even if the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more likely to be executed than when the setting suggestion is decided in the first period, so the setting suggestion in the super reach is executed, the player's expectations for the high setting can be heightened.

In addition, in the first period, when the setting value is 1, execution of the reach notice and setting suggestion is determined at the same ratio, whereas when the setting value is 6, that is, when the setting values are 1, 2, The higher the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution of the setting suggestions than the reach notice. easier to predict.

In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-34, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display (first effect during variable display) in the first period and in the second period. Although the execution of the ready-to-reach notice is determined at a different rate between when the effect during variable display (the effect during variable display for the second time) is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the execution of the ready-to-win notice at the same ratio between when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period. . By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect the execution of the ready-to-win announcement in the same manner in the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, as shown in FIG. 10-34, if the same number of variable display effects are performed, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the ready-to-win notice is executed at the same rate. Although the mode of determination is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the effect during the variable display of the same number of times, execution of the reach notice according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be determined in different proportions. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the execution of the same effect type in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, so that the variable display effect is monotonous. You can prevent it from becoming

(8th invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following eighth invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the eighth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the CPU 103 determines whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit" in the variable pattern setting process of S111). A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not);
Variable display means capable of executing variable display according to the determined variable display pattern (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the effect process during variable display, displays the decorative pattern based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. the part that performs variable display) and
Predetermined effect determination means for determining one of a plurality of effect modes of a predetermined effect (for example, in the variable display effect determination process, patterns PT-1 to PT-9 are selected as the effect pattern of the variable display effect. the part that determines one from
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined effect based on the determination result of the predetermined effect determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as effect during variable display Setting suggestion, or part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
with
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-32 as a fourth embodiment, the variable display during variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect ),
Based on at least the set value that is set, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times is determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control A part where the CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value that is set in the variable display effect in the first period),
Based on at least the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the second number of times after the first number of times among the plurality of times is determined (for example, in the embodiment 4, as shown in FIG. 10-33, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect type of the effect during variable display based on the set value and the variation pattern set for the effect during variable display in the second period. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the criteria for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect are different between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-33, when determining the effect type of the effect during variable display in the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time), the effect during variable display is determined based on the variation pattern of the variable display. Determines the effect type of the effect * Isn't it a set value? (See 103SGS314) On the other hand, when determining the effect type of the effect during variable display in the second period (second effect during variable display), the variation pattern of the variable display and the setting set in the pachinko game machine 1 Based on the value, the type of effect during variable display is determined (see 103SGS319 and 103SGS320). That is, since the criteria for determining the type of effect are different between the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect, the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect are different. , the execution of the same effect type is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period. parts that run at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at different ratios when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, 10-34 as a fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period, and the pattern PT -8 or the part that executes reach notices based on pattern PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of a plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-34 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display during the period, regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the effect control CPU 120 is the first Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate regardless of the set value when executing variable display production in 2 periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, it is set A part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and when the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period. Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, in the first period, regardless of whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, a form of determining whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according to the setting value is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first period, regardless of the variation pattern, it is determined whether to execute setting suggestion or reach notice only according to the set value. may

In addition, in the second period, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach prior to the setting suggestion, but the present invention is not limited to this Instead, in the second period, depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, reach notice and setting suggestion may be determined at the same rate.

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, in the second period, the form of determining whether to execute reach notice or setting suggestion depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach was exemplified, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and in the second period, not only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, but also when it is non-reach or small hit, either reach notice or setting suggestion is executed. You may make it determine whether.

(Modification 2)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the characterizing portion 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and the variable display is started for the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach. A mode in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period from the timing to the start timing of the normal reach effect and the second period after the first period has been exemplified, but the present invention is this. However, the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily stopping the decoration pattern during the variable display of the decoration pattern and then resuming the variable display, one variable display is pseudo-variably displayed a plurality of times. It may be executed at the timing according to the re-variation of the decoration pattern in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect that looks like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-38 as a modified example 2, for all fluctuation patterns of non-reach/small hit, normal reach and super reach, from the start timing of variable display to the start timing of normal reach reach production a first period before the temporary stop of the first decoration pattern, a second period after the first period and corresponding to a re-variable display period after the first temporary stop of the decoration pattern, The effect during variable display can be executed in the third period which is after the second period and corresponds to the re-variable display period after the temporary stop of the decoration pattern for the third time.

In the second modification, the first period is executed before the temporary stop of the first decoration pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is the first period. Executed according to the re-variable display at the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the second period is executed according to the re-variable display at the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and the third period is executed according to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern. It may be executed according to the re-variable display.

In this modification 2, in the above-described effect determination process during variable display, for the first period, regardless of which variation pattern, any one of the set values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 , and for the second period and the third period, variable display based on the set value only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach A process for determining the type of effect is executed.

Specifically, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the variation pattern (does not determine execution of the reach notice). It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio. In the second period, only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, execution of reach notice is determined at a rate of 40%, and execution of setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio. In the third period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, execution of reach notice is decided at a rate of 100%, and execution of setting suggestion is not decided. It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio.

In addition, while the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the second period and the third period is set to be lower than the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the first period, the reach notice is determined in the first period By setting the ratio of determining the reach notice in the second period and the third period to be higher than the ratio, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion. Become.

As described above, in the present modification 2, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and the second period or the second period is performed. When executing the effect during variable display in three periods, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the variation pattern. In other words, since the determination criteria for the performance control CPU 120 to determine the performance mode of the predetermined performance are different between the first period, the second period, and the third period, it is possible to prevent the performance during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect is a variation pattern in which the degree of expectation for a big hit increases as the number of times of re-variable display increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, and so on. Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first re-variable display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, and the second re-variable In the second period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach, but there is also the possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice, and the third re-variable In the third period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is super reach, so the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

By doing so, it is possible to suggest settings while suppressing the decrease in the reliability of the ready-to-win announcement due to the frequent occurrence of the ready-to-win announcement in the case of the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect once or twice. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's expectation for the big win due to the frequent occurrence of setting suggestions in the case of the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous performance of three times.

In addition, in the present modified example 2, in the first period with the lowest jackpot reliability, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value with priority over the reach notice regardless of the variation pattern, so the setting suggestion is preferable. On the other hand, in the second and third periods in which the reliability of the jackpot is higher than in the first period, the reach notice is set according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Since the decision is made with priority, the player's expectation for the big win can be favorably increased.

In addition, in this modified example 2, in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions is determined at a rate of 100%, but in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice. If there is, it does not have to be the one that determines the execution of setting suggestions at a rate of 100%. Also, in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice, but the reach notice may be decided at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. Also, in the third period, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified at a rate of 100%, but in the third period, if the execution of the reach notice is determined at a higher rate than the setting suggestion, the reach notice It does not have to be a 100% decision on execution.

Further, in this modification 2, in the first period, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value with priority over the reach notice, and in the second period and the third period, the fluctuation pattern Although the execution of the reach notice is determined according to whether it is normal reach or super reach with priority over the setting suggestion, the present invention is not limited to this, the first period and the second period , regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value with priority over the reach notice, and in the third period, the reach notice is executed according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach may be determined with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, in the present modification 2, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the setting value with priority over the reach notice, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of In the first number of times (e.g., the first period or the second period), at least if the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined according to the setting value, the setting suggestion or according to the setting value and the fluctuation pattern You may make it determine reach notice.

In addition, in the present modification 2, in the second period and the third period, according to the setting value and the variation pattern, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified prior to the setting suggestion, but the present invention is to this It is not limited, and in the second number of times (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first number of times among the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If there is, the setting suggestion or the reach notice may be determined according to the setting value and the variation pattern.

Further, in Embodiments 2 to 4, as an effect during the variable display executed in the first period, the setting suggestion is determined by making the rate at which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined higher than the rate at which the ready-to-reach notice is determined. Although a form in which priority is given to execution is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. As for the effect, the execution of setting suggestions may be preferentially determined according to the order of processing for determining the effect type.

Further, in Embodiments 2 to 4, as the effect during the variable display executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of the reach notice is determined is set higher than the rate at which the setting suggestion is determined. Although a form in which priority is given to execution is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. As an effect, execution of the ready-to-win announcement may be preferentially determined according to the order of processing for determining the effect type.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, an example is given in which the effects during variable display can be executed multiple times in one variable display. It may be executable over the variable display (see means 5 of the second invention).

Specifically, the CPU 103 suspends and stores information (for example, display results (including jackpot types), random numbers for determining variation patterns, etc.) related to variable display whose execution is suspended when a starting prize is generated. , the display result and the variation pattern are pre-read and determined based on the extracted random value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as the effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 If it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect that predicts the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended), the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice A reach notice or a setting suggestion may be executed as a pre-read notice for the target change over a plurality of times of variable display until the start.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the plurality of images Z1 showing the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 during the variable display effect at predetermined timings. A form of executing the process of changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the middle production determination process to the image Z2 indicating that the images will be destroyed and dropped has been exemplified, but the present invention has been described. is not limited to this, and when the player's operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A may be used) is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z2 changes at the timing corresponding to the operation. You can let it run.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player in the variable display effect as described above, the operation of the push button 31B by the player during the operation valid period of the push button 31B is performed. An operation prompting image (for example, a character image or a button image that says “Continue hitting!”) may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect.

Further, when the push sensor 35B detects a specific action of operating the push button 31B during the operation effective period of the push button 31B, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is being operated, an effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying and dropping the paraglider) can be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B was not detected. In some cases, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during variable display may be ended without performing reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing so, a player who knows the specific action can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. .

In addition, as an operation promoting effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the effective period of operation of the push button 31B, an operation promoting image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the operation promoting effect is executed by emitting light from a light-emitting part built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to. good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific action or the player who has noticed the light emission can see the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state indication result, a form is exemplified in which a reach notice that suggests the possibility of becoming a reach is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, the predetermined effects that result in the indication of an advantageous state include a stop symbol notice suggesting which pattern the variable display will stop at, a character notice that a character will appear, and a step in which the notice image changes step by step. Various advance notice effects can be applied as long as they are suggestive effects suggesting the possibility of a big hit, such as an advance notice, a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area, and the like.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common effect period common to the reach notice and the setting suggestion. It may be a separate production (specifically, the reach notice is suggested using a character, the setting suggestion is suggested by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, the first effect image corresponding to the advance notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion different from the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 in the same period (at the same timing). In this case, the visibility of the first effect image can be improved by, for example, making the display area of the first effect image larger than the display area of the second effect image, or by differentiating the display mode such as the emission color, brightness, contrast, etc. is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image, it is possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image in a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn in the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers, and the setting When the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion is drawn on the second drawing layer which is lower than the first drawing layer, the image drawn on the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer on the image display device 5 are drawn. When the first effect image is overlapped and displayed on the second effect image, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image. By doing so, it is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. Furthermore, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is set higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance of the second effect image (making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is also possible to execute the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the sound modes such as the volume and quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. , that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach announcement may be more audible than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of enhancing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, not only increasing the volume of the sound effect, but also decreasing the volume of other sounds such as BGM to increase the audibility. good too. It should be noted that there are cases where the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is output but the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

Furthermore, when the production control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output the production sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any one of the reproduction channels , for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the ready-to-win notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. In addition, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (the first reproduction channel and the second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced on the first reproduction channel The audibility of the first effect sound is made higher than the audibility of the second effect sound by making the volume and sound quality different from (improving) the volume and sound quality of the second effect sound reproduced on the second reproduction channel, It is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, by changing the light emission mode such as the color, lighting mode, and brightness of the game effect lamp 9 between the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light-emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win notice is changed to the visual recognition of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. In other words, the light emission mode corresponding to the reach advance notice may be made more visible than the light emission mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. In addition, the light is turned on in response to the reach notice, but the light is turned off in response to the setting suggestion.

In other words, when the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, the production result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, as described in Examples 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 and 2. In addition to increasing the execution ratio of the reach notice in the case, when the production result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the production mode such as the display, sound, and light of the reach notice is higher than the production mode of the setting suggestion Including priority etc. Furthermore, executing the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, display, sound , light, and movement of movable bodies.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion indicates which of the setting values 1 to 6 is set as the setting suggestion in the CPU 103, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103 may be, for example, a suggestion of the possibility that the setting value has been changed or the possibility that the setting value has not been changed (deferred).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. High base state (time saving state) where conditions are likely to be established, high probability game state (high probability state) with high probability of becoming a jackpot game state, high probability low base state (latent probability variable state), special reach state (for example , super reach, etc.), including a state where the variation pattern is a variation pattern based on a big hit variation pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the contents are stored. In addition, since scores and points are given to the player instead of the game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

In the slot machine, a state that is advantageous to the player means a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus that increases the probability of winning a small combination, or a state in which an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is announced (for example, an AT (assist time) state). ), and a state in which an advantageous operation mode for the player is notified and the probability of winning a replay combination increases (for example, ART (Assist Replay Time) state).

In addition, when the predetermined effect of the present invention can be executed in a slot machine, a special combination such as a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus is internally won, but the combination of symbols is not complete and the special combination is carried over. Suggestion effects suggesting the possibility that the combination of corresponding symbols will be derived and displayed, setting suggestions suggesting the setting value set in the slot machine can be executed over multiple games (multiple variable displays), AT state It is possible to execute over a plurality of games (multiple times of variable display) from the time an ART state is won until the AT state or ART state is started.

1 pachinko game machine, 5 image display device, 11 main board, 12 effect control board, 100 game control microcomputer, 103 CPU, 120 effect control CPU.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Controllable to one of a plurality of types of advantageous states including a first type of advantageous state and a second type of advantageous state in which the expected value of the game value to be obtained is lower than that of the first type of advantageous state. favorable state control means;
variable means capable of changing to a state in which game media can be entered in an advantageous state;
a notification effect means capable of executing a notification effect, which notifies that the control is performed to an advantageous state;
after the end of the notification effect, a specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect in a specific period until the variable means changes to a state in which the game medium can enter,
The specific period is longer when controlled to the first type of advantageous state than when controlled to the second type of advantageous state,
The notification effect means is
a first notification effect for informing that the player will be controlled to the first type of advantageous state after suggesting the possibility of being controlled to the first type of advantageous state in a manner that can specify that the player will be controlled to the first type of advantageous state;
a second notification effect for notifying that the second type of advantageous state will be controlled after suggesting the possibility of the advantageous state being achieved in a manner that can specify that the second type of advantageous state will be controlled; is executable and
The specific production means is
a first specific effect that congratulates the player, which is an effect that is executed after the end of the first notification effect and is not executed after the end of the second notification effect;
A second specific effect that is executed after the end of the second notification effect and notifies that the control to the first type of advantageous state is promoted as if promoted;
A third specific effect that is executed after the end of the second notification effect and notifies that the second type of advantageous state is controlled ,
The execution period of the first specific effect is longer than that of the second specific effect,
The execution period of the second specific effect is longer than that of the third specific effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images